advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 215
MULTI F MULTI F MAX INDOOR UNIT ENGINEERING MANUAL Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Units Art CoolTM Mirror Wall-Mounted Art CoolTM Gallery Wall-Mounted Four-Way Ceiling Cassette Ceiling-Concealed Duct Indoor Units for Multi-Zone Heat Pump Systems 7,000 to 36,000 Btu/h PROPRIETARY DATA NOTICE This document, as well as all reports, illustrations, data, information, and other materials are the property of LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., and are disclosed by LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., only in confidence. This document is for design purposes only. EM_MultiF_IDU_3_18 For continual product development, LG reserves the right to change specifications without notice. ©LG Electronics Inc. TABLE OF SYMBOLS DANGER This symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Note: This symbol indicates situations that may result in equipment or property damage accidents only. This symbol indicates an action that should not be performed. This document, as well as all reports, illustrations, data, information, and other materials are the property of LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TABLE OF CONTENTS Convergence of Technology, Innovation, Flexibility, & Style.....................................................4 Factory Supplied Parts and Materials / Installation������������������������� 103 Installation and Best Layout Practices.............................................. 104 Unit Nomenclature........................................................................5 Four-Way Ceiling Cassette Indoor Units................................113 Functions, Controls and Options Overview.........................................................................6 Art Cool Mirror Indoor Units......................................................10 Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 10 General Data / Specifications..............................................................11 Dimensions......................................................................................... 12 Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 14 Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 16 Acoustic Data..................................................................................... 17 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution........................................... 18 Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................... 19 Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 20 Factory Supplied Parts and Materials................................................. 21 Installation and Best Layout Practices................................................ 22 Art Cool Gallery Indoor Units....................................................29 Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units.......................................49 Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 49 General Data / Specifications............................................................. 50 Dimensions......................................................................................... 51 Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 53 Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 56 Acoustic Data..................................................................................... 58 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution........................................... 60 Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................... 62 Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 63 Factory Supplied Parts and Materials................................................. 65 Installation and Best Layout Practices................................................ 66 Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units..................................................73 Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 73 General Data / Specifications............................................................. 74 Dimensions......................................................................................... 75 Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 76 Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 78 External Static Pressure..................................................................... 79 Acoustic Data..................................................................................... 80 Refrigerant Flow Diagrams................................................................. 81 Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 83 Factory Supplied Parts and Materials................................................. 84 Installation and Best Layout Practices................................................ 85 Two-Way VAHU Indoor Units...................................................137 Mechanical Specifications and Features.......................................... 137 General Data / Specifications........................................................... 138 Dimensions....................................................................................... 139 Cooling Capacity Table..................................................................... 140 Heating Capacity Table..................................................................... 141 External Static Pressure................................................................... 142 Acoustic Data................................................................................... 143 Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................. 144 Wiring Diagram................................................................................. 145 Factory Supplied Parts and Materials............................................... 147 Installation and Best Layout Practices.............................................. 148 Four-Way VAHU Indoor Units..................................................157 Mechanical Specifications and Features.......................................... 157 General Data / Specifications........................................................... 158 Dimensions....................................................................................... 159 Cooling Capacity Table..................................................................... 160 Heating Capacity Table..................................................................... 162 External Static Pressure and Airflow Ranges................................... 164 Acoustic Data................................................................................... 167 Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................. 170 Wiring Diagram................................................................................. 171 Factory Supplied Parts and Materials............................................... 173 Installation and Best Layout Practices.............................................. 174 Application Guidelines.............................................................183 Equipment Selection Procedure....................................................... 184 Placement Considerations................................................................ 191 Refrigerant Piping Design.......................................................198 Design Guideline Summary.............................................................. 198 Creating a Balanced System / Manual Layout Procedure 200 Condensate Drain Piping.................................................................. 201 Electrical Connections.............................................................204 General Information.......................................................................... 204 Power Wiring (208-230V) and Comm Cable Details����������������������� 207 Remote Controller Connections....................................................... 212 Indoor Unit Group Control................................................................ 213 Acronyms..................................................................................214 Duct (High Static) Indoor Units.................................................95 Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 95 General Data / Specifications............................................................. 96 Dimensions......................................................................................... 97 Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 98 Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 99 External Static Pressure / Acoustic Data.......................................... 100 Refrigerant Flow Diagrams............................................................... 101 Wiring Diagrams............................................................................... 102 INTRODUCTION | 3 Introduction Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 29 General Data / Specifications............................................................. 30 Dimensions......................................................................................... 31 Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 32 Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 33 Acoustic Data..................................................................................... 34 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution........................................... 35 Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................... 36 Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 37 Factory Supplied Parts and Materials................................................. 38 Installation and Best Layout Practices................................................ 39 Mechanical Specifications and Features...........................................113 General Data / Specifications............................................................114 Dimensions........................................................................................115 Cooling Capacity Table......................................................................117 Heating Capacity Table..................................................................... 120 Acoustic Data................................................................................... 121 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution......................................... 123 Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................. 125 Wiring Diagram................................................................................. 126 Factory Supplied Parts and Materials............................................... 127 Installation and Best Layout Practices.............................................. 128 CONVERGENCE OF TECHNOLOGY, INNOVATION, FLEXIBILITY, & STYLE Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual About LG Electronics, Inc. LG Electronics is a global leader and technology innovator in consumer electronics, mobile communications, and home appliances. LG Electronics comprises five business units—Home Entertainment, Mobile Communications, Air Conditioning, Business Solutions, and Home Appliance. LG is one of the world’s leading producers of flat panel televisions, audio and video products, mobile handsets, air conditioners, and washing machines. LG’s commercial air conditioning business unit was established in 1968 and has built its lineup of residential and commercial products to include VRF, Multi F, ductfree split systems, packaged terminal air conditioners (PTACs), and room air conditioners. In 2011, the air conditioning and energy solutions business unit grew to include LED lighting and solar products. For more information, visit www.lg.com. includes its own remote control, allowing the customer to set the temperature individually. Indoor units are available in several different configurations: Art Cool™ Mirror wall-mounted, Art Cool Gallery wall-mounted, standard wall-mounted, four-way ceiling cassettes, ceiling-concealed duct (high and low static), and vertical-horizontal air handling models. Multi F MAX systems can operate up to eight indoor units through two-, three-, or four-port branch distribution units. Adaptable and Flexible Multi-Zone Systems Multi F outdoor units can be adapted to a wide range of building applications and sizes such as schools, hotels, hospitals, offices, and residences. The system components are lightweight and compact so they can be placed in buildings without expensive cranes, they easily fit into most service elevators, and they can be set in place with minimal structural reinforcements requirements. Multi F technology allows you to pipe farther by reaching areas of the building that would require the installation of a second system when using traditional direct-expansion cooling and heating equipment. Multi F provides the designer with uncompromised pipe system engineering flexibility—long pipe runs and large elevation differences. Whether your building is a condominium, a hotel, a school, or an office complex, Multi F is best suited to reach the farthest corners and elevations. Multi F Systems Smaller Chases and Plenums LG HVAC systems offer a range of solutions that are cost efficient, quiet and attractive. Multi-zone systems are “split” into indoor and outdoor units, and provide a smart alternative to both central HVAC and window-mounted air conditioners. These inverter heat pump systems are available in a variety of configurations to suit different cooling and heating situations. Installation by a trained HVAC contractor is safe and easy – little to no duct work or sheet metal is required. LG’s inverter heat pumps can support two, three, or four indoor units that are typically installed in separate rooms. Each indoor unit • • • • • Benefits of Multi F Systems Individual zone control Long refrigerant piping lengths High refrigerant piping elevation differences Maximum flexibility Operating ranges of 14°F to 118°F (DB) in cooling and -4°F to 75°F (DB) in heating if connected to standard Multi F Outdoor Units or -13°F to 75°F (DB) in heating if connected to Multi F with LG REDº Outdoor Units. • Quiet and comfortable environment • Reduced ductwork LG Multi F systems use refrigerant piping to move heat, resulting in smaller space requirements for piping as compared to chilled water or roof top systems. This helps reduce the overall construction and material cost of the building, and gives back leasable space. Flexible and logical placement of system components, reduced back-andforth pipe lengths, and fewer joints lowers installation costs and minimizes potential leaking. Quality Commitment LG is committed to the success of duct-free projects. We provide technical support during installation and commissioning. LG offers a variety of classes designed for installers and servicers on Multi F installation. Classes are conducted at LG’s training centers and in field locations at various times throughout the year and on special request. MULTI F 4 | INTRODUCTION Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX UNIT NOMENCLATURE Multi-Zone Systems — Indoor Units and Outdoor Units L M DN 12 6 HV BD 36 2 0 L = LG Type: M = Multi-Zone Component: AN: Art Cool™ Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit N: Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit CN: Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit DN: Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Unit HN: Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit VN: Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit U: Outdoor Unit Nominal Capacity (Nominal cooling capacity in Btu/h): 15 = 15,000 18 = 18,000 24 = 24,000 30 = 30,000 36 = 36,000 42 = 42,000 48 = 48,000 54 = 54,000 Introduction 07 = 7,000 09 = 9,000 12 = 12,000 Generation Features: H = Heat Pump V = Inverter T = High Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit P = Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit Branch Distribution Units P M P = Part (Accessory) Type: M = Multi-Zone BD: Branch Distribution Unit Family Number of Port Connections (Maximum Number of Connectable Indoor Units): 2, 3, 4 Generation: 0, 1 • Voltage for all equipment is 208-230V, 60 Hz, 1-phase. • All indoor units are compatible with wired controllers. • All outdoor units are LGAP control network compatible with PI-485 V-net Control Integration Board (PMNFP14A1, sold separately). • Compatible single zone IDU nomenclature is listed in the Single Zone Wall-Mounted IDU Engineering Manual. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. INTRODUCTION | 5 MULTI F MULTI F MAX FUNCTIONS, CONTROLS AND OPTIONS OVERVIEW Table 1: Indoor Units—Functions, Controls and Options. Special Function Controllers Operation Filter Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Airflow Indoor Unit Type Air supply outlets Airflow direction (left/right) Airflow direction (up/down) Auto swing (left/right) Auto swing (up/down) Airflow steps (fan/cool/heat) Comfort Air (random fan speed) Jet-cool/Jet Heat (power wind) Swirl wind Washable anti-fungal1 Plasma2 3M Micro Dust Filter2 Ventilation Drain pump E.S.P. control Electric heater High ceiling5 Hot Start Self diagnostics Soft Dry (dehumidification) Auto operation Auto clean (coil dry) Auto restart Child lock Forced operation Group control – Requires the use of one Group control Cable Kit (PZCWRCG3) for every additional indoor unit Sleep mode Timer (on/off) Weekly schedule Two thermistor control 7-Day programmable controller Simple wired remote controller Wireless LCD remote control Dry contact Dry contact (temperature setting) Central control (LGAP) Connector for Water Sensor Wi-Fi8 Ceiling ART COOL™ ART COOL™ Standard Wall Concealed Mirror Wall Gallery Mounted (Low Static) Mounted Ducted 1 Auto Auto √ √ 6/6/6 √ √ 3 Auto Auto √ √ 5/5/4 √ √ 1 Auto Auto √ √ 6/6/6 √ √ √ √ √ √ 4 1 2 Auto 3/3/3 3/3/3 √ √ √ 4/5/4 √ √ √ √ o3 3/3/3 √ √ √ √ √4 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ o √ √ √ √ √ √ o √ √ √ √ √ √ √ o √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ o √ o √ o √ o o o o o o o o5 √ √ o o o o √ o o √ √ √ √ o o o o √ o o √ √ √ √ o o o o √ o o √ √ √ √ √ o o √ o6 o o √ √ √ √ o o √ o6 o o √ √ √ o o o o √ o o √ √ √ √ o o √ o6 √7 o √ √ Primary washable filters. Secondary filter 3 Branch location and static pressure requirements. Requires PTPKQ0 Plasma kit. 4 Requires ventilation kit PTVK430 (Temperature, humidity, and volume limitations apply). √ Group control may affect available features Requires wired zone controller 7 For use with 3rd party thermostat 8 Embedded. Optional for LVNxxxHV4 4-way VAHU. Not available for 2-way LMVNxxxHV VAHU. 5 6 INTRODUCTION VerticalHorizontal Air Handling Unit √ √ √ √ √ √ o √ 2 | Four-Way Ceiling Cassette √ 1 6 1 Ceiling Concealed (High Static) Ducted √ √ √ √ o √ = Standard feature o = Unit option Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FUNCTIONS, CONTROLS AND OPTIONS OVERVIEW Table 2: Indoor Unit Accessories Overview. Model No. Description For Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units PT-QCHW0 PT-UQC PTVK430 PTDCQ PTPKQ0 PRARH0 Wall-Mounted Indoor Units PCRCUDT3 AG-9300-LG PRARS1 For Vertical-Horizontal Air Handing Units PNDFJ0 PNDFK0 ANEH033B1 ANEH053B1 ANEH083B2 ANEH103B2 Ceiling Grille Ceiling Grille Flange for All Capacities Decorative Cover Plasma Filter Aux Heat Relay Kit Wi-Fi Module (LSN/LMN models) Condensate Sensor Aux Heat Relay Kit Downflow Conversion Kit (18/24MBH) Downflow Conversiion Kit (36MBH) 3 kW Electric Heater (18-36MBH) 5 kW Electric Heater (18-36MBH) 8 kW Electric Heater (18-36MBH) 10 kW Electric Heater (18-36MBH) 15 kW Electric Heater (36MBH) ANEH203B2 20 kW Electric Heater (36MBH) PRARH0 Aux Heat Relay Kit PCRCUDT3 Wi-Fi Module Introduction ANEH153B2 For Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Units ZFBXBG01A High Efficiency Filter Box ZFBXD201A Dynamic V8 2VL Low Profile Air Cleaner ZPLMV201A Dynamic 2VL Air Cleaner Low Profile Return Air Plenum ZFBXD402A Dynamic V8 4VL Low Profile Air Cleaner ZPLMV402A Dynamic 4VL Air Cleaner Low Profile Return Air Plenum ZFLT1301A 4-Pack Dynamic V8 VL Air Cleaner Replacement Filter Pads ZFLT1302A 24-Pack Dynamic V8 VL Air Cleaner Replacement Filter Pads ZGRLRA01A Dynamic V8 Air Cleaner Louvered Return Air Grille (one per plenum ) ZGRLRA02A Dynamic V8 Air Cleaner Egg Crate Return Air Grille (one per plenum) PRARH0 Aux Heat Relay Kit Controls Accessories PQWRHQ0FDB Wireless Handheld Remote (Duct/VAHU) PREMTA000A Premium Controller PREMTB10U Programmable Controller PQRCVCL0Q(W) Simple Controller (Wall/Cassette) PREMTBVC0 MultiSITE CRC1 Base Controller PREMTBVC1 MultiSITE CRC1 Plus Controller ZVRCZ**** MultiSITE CRC1 Wireless Accessories PDRYCB100 Dry Contact (Simple) PDRYCB300 Dry Contact (3rd party controller) PDRYCB400 Dry Contact (Setback) ZRTBS01 Remote Temp Sensor (Cassette/Duct/VAHU) PZCWRCG3 Group Control Cable Kit PZCWRC1 Controller Extension Cable Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. INTRODUCTION | 7 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual MULTI F MULTI F MAX 8 | INTRODUCTION Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNIT DATA ™ “Mechanical Specifications” on page 10 “General Data / Specifications” on page 11 “Dimensions” on page 12 “Cooling Capacity Table” on page 14 “Heating Capacity Table” on page 16 “Acoustic Data” on page 17 “Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution” on page 18 “Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 19 “Wiring Diagram” on page 20 “Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 21 “Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 22 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Mechanical Specifications and Features ART COOL Mirror Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Figure 1: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit. General Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. ART COOL Mirror Wall-Mounted indoor units have a sound rating no higher than 44 dB(A) as tested per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745. Coil Indoor unit coils are comprised of a minimum of two rows of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. The coils are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil. Refrigerant System System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare. All refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be field insulated. Electrical Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power with voltage variances of ±10%. Casing Units are designed to mount on a vertical surface, and are shipped with a separate back plate that secures the unit to the wall, protruding no more than nine (9) inches. Unit is designed so that refrigerant piping can be installed in one (1) of four (4) different directions. Finish The Art Cool Mirror unit has a flat, architectural panel with a smoked charcoal mirror finish. Unit casing has a dark grey finish and is manufactured of heavy-duty acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) and high impact polystyrene (HIPS) plastic. Fan Assembly and Control The unit has a single, direct-drive, crossflow fan made of high strength ABS plastic. The fan motor is brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan and motor assembly is mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digitally controlled algorithm that provides pre-programmed, field-selectable fixed or auto fan speeds in the Heating and Cooling modes. For Art Cool Mirror Wall-Mounted units, the indoor fan has Low, Med, High, Jet Cool and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High, Jet Heat and Auto settings for Heating mode. The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the controller setpoint and space temperature. Also, the separate Chaos setting provides a simultaneous and random change in fan speed and flow direction at the discharge, simulating a natural outdoor breeze. Features • • • • Inverter (Variable speed fan) Comfort Air 3M filter Jet cool/Jet heat 10 | ART COOL MIRROR • • • • Air Filter Return air inlet has a factory-supplied primary removable, washable filter. The unit is also equipped with a secondary 3M Micro Dust filter. Filters are accessed from the front of the unit without the use of tools. Airflow Guide Vanes A motorized guide vane is factory installed, and allows the ability to control the direction of airflow from side to side. A motorized louver provides an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution. Microprocessor Control The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate mode. The microprocessor will also provide self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power/communications cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit. Controls The indoor unit casing has a factory-standard, integral infrared sensor designed to communicate with the supplied LG wireless handheld remote controller. An optional LG supplied wired controller is available as an additional accessory. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power/communication cable. The indoor unit has built-in wi-fi and can be controlled with LG’s SmartThinQ app on a smart device. A field-supplied wi-fi network and smart device are required. The SmartThinQ app is free and is available for Android and iOS smart devices. Condensate The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate and includes a flexible drain hose capable of installation in one of two directions. Unit includes a connection that is compatible with the AquaGuard® AG-9300-LG condensate sensor. Group Control Self-cleaning indoor coil Auto operation Auto restart operation • • • • Built-in wi-fi Dehumidifying function Self diagnosis function Wireless LCD remote control included Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS General Data / Specifications Table 3: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit General Data. Model Name Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h) 1 LAN090HSV5 LAN120HSV5 LAN180HSV5 9,000 12,000 18,000 10,900 13,600 21,600 Operating Range Cooling (°F WB) Heating (°F DB) 57-77 59-81 Fan Type Cross Flow Motor Output (W) x Qty. 30 x 1 Motor/Drive 60.0 x 1 Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) 268 / 218 / 169 282 / 233 / 177 558 / 438 / 353 Unit Data Refrigerant Type2 R410A Art Cool Mirror™ Refrigerant Control EEV Power Supply V, Ø, Hz3 208-230, 1, 60 Rated Amps (A) 0.4 Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L) Dimensions (W x H x D, in.) 4 36 / 32 / 27 38 / 34 / 29 44 / 38 / 34 32-15/16 x 12-1/8 x 7-9/16 39-9/32 x 13-19/32 x 8-11/32 Net Unit Weight (lbs.) 20.5 29.8 Shipping Weight (lbs.) 25.6 36.4 Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)5 Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number 4 x 18 (2 x 23 x 22) x 1 (2 x 16 x 20) x 1 Pipe Size Liquid (in.) 1/4 Vapor (in.) 3/8 1/2 Liquid (in.) 1/4 3/8 Vapor (in.) 3/8 5/8 Connection Size Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.) 27/32, 5/8 Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 2 This unit comes with a dry helium charge. 1 Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V. Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during operation. 5 All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 3 4 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL MIRROR | 11 Refrigerant, Drain Pipe, and Cable Knock Out Hole 2 (51) Display & Remote Controller Signal Receiver Signal Bottom 2-3/8 (60) 3-5/8 (92) Left & Right 55° Refrigerant, Drain Pipe and Cable Knock Out Hole 5/16 (8) 3-21/32 (93) 5-19/32 (142) Ø2-9/16 (65) 3-27/32 (98) 5-31/32 (152) 12-1/16 (306) 32-15/16 (837) Installation Plate Unit Outline Unit Outline Connecting Gas/Liquid Pipe 32-15/16 (837) Fixing the Installation Plate, Drilling Hole 29/32 (23) 3-11/16 (94) Ø2-9/16 (65) 7-27/32 (199) 5-9/32 (134) 7-5/8 (194) In Case of Left Side Piping 5-3/16 (132) 2-15/32 (63) Rear Right 2 (51) 7-9/16 (192) Air Intake Air Outlet Terminal Block for Power Supply and Communication Approx. 11-11/32 (288) to gas pipe Refrigerant, Drain Approx. 8-19/32 (218) to liquid pipe Pipe and Cable Knock Out Hole Drain Hose Connection 1-1/2 (38) 2-15/32 (63) [30-3/16 (767)] Air Intake Hole 32-15/16 (837) [28-5/32 (715)] Air Outlet Hole Heating 55° 29/32 (23) Rear Left 1-7/16 (33.5) Decoration Cover Up & Down * If airflow direction control is available, Cooling 15° 85° 12-1/8 (308) Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Dimensions Unit : inch (mm) 1-1/4 (31) 2-7/16 ( 61.5) 1-3/32 (50.2) 1-1/16 (26.2) 1/4 (6) x 1/8 (3) 1/8 (3) x 1/4 (6) 15° 45° Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. | ART COOL MIRROR 12 11/32 (9) 12-1/8 (308) 12-1/8 (308) 2-7/32(56) 10-11/32 (263) 2-17/32 (64) 1-27/32(47) 2-5/16 (59) [5-29/32 (150)] Air Intake Hole 2 Air -7/32 Ou (5 tlet 6) Ho le 5/8 (15.3) 1-9/32 (32.7) 2-13/32 (61) 2-7/32 (56) 5-31/32 (152) MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Figure 2: LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 Dimensions. ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Dimensions MULTI F MULTI F MAX Figure 3: LAN180HSV5 Dimensions. Rear Right Bottom Air Outlet 8-11/32 (212) Air Intake Refrigerant, Drain Pipe and Cable Knock Out Hole Drain Hose Connection Approx. 9-7/16 (240) to gas pipe Approx. 6-5/16 (160) to liquid pipe 7/16 (11) 2-3/8 (60) Terminal Block for Power Supply and Communication Refrigerant, Drain Pipe and Cable Knock Out Hole 4-17/32 (115) 5-29/32 (150) Ø2-9/16 (65) 3-9/32 (83) 5-9/32 (134) 1-15/32 (37) 14-11/16 (373) 39-9/32 (998) Installation Plate Unit Outline 1-1/16 (27) 5-13/32 (137) Ø2-9/16 (65) 7-13/32 (188) 3-9/32 (83) 5-29/32 (150) 6-15/32 (164) In case of Left Side Piping Fixing the Installation Plate, Drilling Hole 39-9/32 (998) Unit Outline Connecting Gas/Liquid Pipe 13 | ART COOL MIRROR Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Art Cool Mirror™ Display & Remote Controller Signal Receiver Signal 50° 2-23/32 (69) [36-5/32 (918)] Air Intake Hole 39-9/32 (998) [34-11/32 (872)] Air Outlet Hole 2-1/4 (57) 3-17/32 (90) 2-7/32 (56) Left & Right 50° 13-19/32 (345) Rear Left 1-7/16 (33.5) Decoration Cover Up & Down Heating * If airflow direction control is available, Cooling 20° 1-1/16 (27) Unit : inch (mm) 2-3/8 (60) 1-1/4 (31) 2-7/16 ( 61.5) 1-3/32 (50.2) 1-1/16 (26.2) 1/8 (3) x 1/4 (6) 15° 45° 85° 2-3/8 (60) 2-3/32 (53) 11-13/16 (300) 2-15/32 (63) 2-3/32 (53) 13-19/32 (345) 13-19/32 (345) 7/16(11) [6-11/16 (170)] Air Intake Hole A [2-29 ir O /32 utle (7 t H 4)] ole 5/8 (15.3) 1-9/32 (32.7) 2-13/32 (61) Refrigerant, Drain Pipe, and Cable Knock Out Hole 2-3/8 (60) 1/4 (6) x 1/8 (3) 5-31/32 (152) MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 4: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LAN090HSV5 9,000 LAN120HSV5 12,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC 8.82 8.82 8.81 8.80 8.80 8.79 8.78 8.78 8.77 8.76 8.76 8.75 8.54 8.33 8.12 7.91 7.68 7.50 7.31 7.12 6.94 6.82 6.79 11.76 11.75 11.75 11.74 11.73 11.72 11.71 11.70 11.69 11.68 11.67 11.66 11.38 11.10 10.83 10.55 10.25 10.00 9.75 9.50 9.25 9.10 9.05 6.04 6.09 6.13 6.18 6.23 6.28 6.32 6.37 6.42 6.46 6.51 6.56 6.45 6.34 6.22 6.10 6.04 5.88 5.72 5.52 5.36 5.32 5.30 8.51 8.57 8.64 8.71 8.77 8.84 8.90 8.97 9.03 9.10 9.17 9.23 9.08 8.92 8.76 8.60 8.51 8.28 8.05 7.77 7.54 7.49 7.47 73 / 61 TC SHC 9.37 9.36 9.36 9.35 9.34 9.33 9.33 9.32 9.31 9.31 9.30 9.29 9.08 8.87 8.66 8.45 8.22 8.03 7.84 7.66 7.47 7.36 7.32 12.49 12.48 12.48 12.47 12.46 12.45 12.44 12.43 12.42 12.41 12.40 12.39 12.11 11.82 11.54 11.26 10.96 10.71 10.46 10.21 9.96 9.81 9.76 6.38 6.43 6.48 6.53 6.58 6.63 6.68 6.73 6.78 6.83 6.88 6.92 6.82 6.71 6.60 6.48 6.43 6.26 6.10 5.90 5.74 5.70 5.69 8.99 9.06 9.13 9.20 9.27 9.34 9.41 9.47 9.54 9.61 9.68 9.75 9.60 9.45 9.29 9.13 9.05 8.82 8.59 8.31 8.08 8.03 8.01 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 9.92 9.91 9.90 9.90 9.89 9.88 9.87 9.87 9.86 9.85 9.84 9.84 9.62 9.41 9.20 8.99 8.75 8.57 8.38 8.19 8.01 7.89 7.86 13.22 13.21 13.20 13.19 13.18 13.17 13.16 13.15 13.14 13.13 13.12 13.11 12.83 12.55 12.26 11.98 11.67 11.42 11.17 10.92 10.67 10.52 10.48 6.18 6.23 6.27 6.32 6.37 6.42 6.47 6.51 6.56 6.61 6.66 6.70 6.61 6.51 6.41 6.31 6.26 6.11 5.96 5.78 5.63 5.60 5.59 8.70 8.77 8.84 8.90 8.97 9.04 9.11 9.17 9.24 9.31 9.38 9.44 9.31 9.17 9.03 8.88 8.82 8.61 8.40 8.14 7.92 7.88 7.87 10.31 10.31 10.30 10.29 10.28 10.27 10.27 10.26 10.25 10.24 10.24 10.23 10.01 9.80 9.59 9.37 9.00 8.88 8.77 8.58 8.39 8.28 8.24 13.75 13.74 13.73 13.72 13.71 13.70 13.69 13.68 13.67 13.66 13.65 13.64 13.35 13.07 12.78 12.50 12.00 11.84 11.69 11.44 11.19 11.04 10.99 6.31 6.36 6.41 6.46 6.50 6.55 6.60 6.65 6.70 6.75 6.80 6.85 6.75 6.66 6.56 6.46 6.32 6.22 6.12 5.94 5.79 5.76 5.76 8.88 8.95 9.02 9.09 9.16 9.23 9.30 9.37 9.44 9.50 9.57 9.64 9.51 9.38 9.24 9.10 8.90 8.76 8.62 8.37 8.15 8.12 8.11 TC 86 / 72 SHC 11.01 11.01 11.00 10.99 10.98 10.97 10.96 10.96 10.95 10.94 10.93 10.92 10.71 10.49 10.28 10.06 9.83 9.64 9.45 9.26 9.08 8.96 8.93 14.69 14.67 14.66 14.65 14.64 14.63 14.62 14.61 14.60 14.59 14.57 14.56 14.27 13.99 13.70 13.42 13.10 12.85 12.60 12.35 12.10 11.95 11.90 6.36 6.41 6.46 6.51 6.56 6.61 6.66 6.71 6.76 6.81 6.85 6.90 6.82 6.73 6.64 6.55 6.52 6.37 6.23 6.06 5.91 5.89 5.89 8.96 9.03 9.10 9.17 9.24 9.31 9.38 9.45 9.52 9.58 9.65 9.72 9.60 9.48 9.36 9.22 9.18 8.98 8.78 8.53 8.33 8.30 8.29 TC 90 / 75 SHC 11.56 11.55 11.54 11.54 11.53 11.52 11.51 11.50 11.49 11.48 11.47 11.47 11.25 11.03 10.82 10.60 10.36 10.17 9.99 9.80 9.61 9.50 9.46 15.42 15.40 15.39 15.38 15.37 15.36 15.35 15.33 15.32 15.31 15.30 15.29 15.00 14.71 14.42 14.13 13.81 13.56 13.31 13.07 12.82 12.67 12.62 6.48 6.53 6.58 6.63 6.68 6.73 6.78 6.83 6.88 6.93 6.98 7.03 6.96 6.87 6.79 6.70 6.67 6.53 6.39 6.22 6.08 6.06 6.06 9.13 9.20 9.27 9.34 9.41 9.48 9.55 9.62 9.70 9.77 9.84 9.91 9.79 9.68 9.56 9.43 9.39 9.20 9.01 8.76 8.56 8.54 8.53 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. 14 | ART COOL MIRROR Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 5: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table (continued). Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LAN180HSV5 18,000 17.65 17.63 17.62 17.60 17.59 17.58 17.56 17.55 17.54 17.52 17.51 17.50 17.08 16.66 16.24 15.82 15.37 14.99 14.62 14.24 13.87 13.65 13.57 12.33 12.43 12.52 12.62 12.71 12.81 12.90 13.00 13.10 13.19 13.29 13.38 13.16 12.93 12.70 12.46 12.33 12.00 11.67 11.27 10.93 10.85 10.83 73 / 61 TC SHC 18.74 18.73 18.71 18.70 18.68 18.67 18.66 18.64 18.63 18.61 18.60 18.58 18.16 17.74 17.32 16.90 16.44 16.06 15.69 15.32 14.94 14.72 14.64 13.02 13.13 13.23 13.33 13.43 13.53 13.63 13.73 13.83 13.93 14.03 14.13 13.92 13.70 13.47 13.23 13.12 12.78 12.45 12.05 11.71 11.64 11.62 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 19.84 19.82 19.81 19.79 19.78 19.76 19.75 19.73 19.72 19.70 19.69 19.67 19.24 18.82 18.40 17.97 17.51 17.13 16.76 16.39 16.01 15.79 15.71 12.61 12.71 12.81 12.91 13.00 13.10 13.20 13.30 13.39 13.49 13.59 13.69 13.49 13.30 13.09 12.88 12.78 12.47 12.17 11.79 11.48 11.42 11.40 20.63 20.61 20.60 20.58 20.57 20.55 20.53 20.52 20.50 20.49 20.47 20.46 20.03 19.60 19.17 18.75 18.00 17.77 17.53 17.16 16.79 16.56 16.49 12.88 12.98 13.08 13.18 13.28 13.38 13.48 13.58 13.68 13.78 13.87 13.97 13.79 13.60 13.40 13.19 12.90 12.70 12.50 12.13 11.82 11.77 11.75 TC 86 / 72 SHC 22.03 22.01 22.00 21.98 21.96 21.94 21.93 21.91 21.89 21.88 21.86 21.84 21.41 20.98 20.55 20.12 19.65 19.28 18.90 18.53 18.15 17.93 17.85 12.98 13.09 13.19 13.29 13.39 13.49 13.59 13.69 13.79 13.89 13.99 14.09 13.92 13.75 13.56 13.37 13.30 13.01 12.73 12.36 12.07 12.03 12.01 TC 90 / 75 SHC 23.12 23.11 23.09 23.07 23.05 23.04 23.02 23.00 22.98 22.97 22.95 22.93 22.50 22.06 21.63 21.20 20.72 20.35 19.97 19.60 19.22 19.00 18.92 13.23 13.33 13.44 13.54 13.64 13.75 13.85 13.95 14.05 14.16 14.26 14.36 14.20 14.03 13.85 13.67 13.61 13.33 13.05 12.70 12.41 12.37 12.36 Art Cool Mirror™ 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL MIRROR | 15 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 6: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) Outdoor Air Temp. °F DB °F WB 61 TC 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 5.61 6.32 7.03 7.98 8.33 8.93 9.44 9.96 10.42 10.87 11.06 11.24 11.53 11.53 11.53 11.53 7.00 7.89 8.78 9.95 10.40 11.14 11.78 12.42 13.00 13.56 13.80 14.02 14.39 14.39 14.39 14.39 11.11 12.52 13.93 15.81 16.51 17.69 18.70 19.72 20.63 21.55 21.91 22.26 22.86 22.86 22.86 22.86 LAN090HSV5 10,900 LAN120HSV5 13,600 LAN180HSV5 21,600 64 TC 5.53 6.24 6.95 7.90 8.26 8.85 9.36 9.87 10.33 10.80 10.98 11.15 11.46 11.46 11.46 11.46 6.90 7.78 8.67 9.86 10.30 11.03 11.67 12.31 12.89 13.46 13.70 13.91 14.29 14.29 14.29 14.29 10.96 12.37 13.77 15.65 16.36 17.53 18.55 19.56 20.48 21.39 21.76 22.11 22.70 22.70 22.70 22.70 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 TC TC 5.48 6.18 6.90 7.85 8.21 8.79 9.31 9.82 10.28 10.74 10.93 11.10 11.40 11.40 11.40 11.40 6.83 7.71 8.60 9.79 10.23 10.96 11.60 12.24 12.82 13.39 13.63 13.84 14.22 14.22 14.22 14.22 10.85 12.26 13.67 15.55 16.25 17.43 18.44 19.46 20.37 21.29 21.65 22.01 22.59 22.59 22.59 22.59 5.45 6.16 6.88 7.82 8.18 8.77 9.29 9.79 10.25 10.71 10.90 11.08 11.37 11.37 11.37 11.37 6.80 7.69 8.58 9.76 10.20 10.95 11.59 12.21 12.79 13.36 13.60 13.82 14.19 14.19 14.19 14.19 10.80 12.21 13.61 15.49 16.20 17.37 18.39 19.41 20.32 21.24 21.60 21.95 22.53 22.53 22.53 22.53 72 TC 75 TC 5.37 6.08 6.79 7.75 8.09 8.69 9.20 9.72 10.18 10.64 10.82 10.99 11.30 11.30 11.30 11.30 6.70 7.59 8.48 9.67 10.10 10.85 11.49 12.13 12.70 13.28 13.50 13.72 14.10 14.10 14.10 14.10 10.64 12.06 13.46 15.34 16.04 17.22 18.24 19.25 20.17 21.08 21.44 21.80 22.38 22.38 22.38 22.38 5.14 5.85 6.56 7.48 7.82 8.37 8.93 9.47 9.94 10.40 10.59 10.73 10.98 11.03 11.06 11.11 6.50 7.40 8.31 9.47 9.90 10.60 11.30 11.99 12.58 13.16 13.40 13.59 13.90 13.96 14.00 14.06 10.18 11.58 12.99 14.84 15.49 16.59 17.69 18.79 19.70 20.61 20.98 21.27 21.76 21.85 21.91 22.02 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 16 | ART COOL MIRROR Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Acoustic Data Figure 4: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. 3.3 ft. • Measurement taken 2.6′ below the bottom of the unit and at a distance of 3.3′ from face of unit. • Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full load normal operating condition. • Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is installed. • Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±1. • Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745. Table 7: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]). 2.6 ft. Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating) High Fan Speed Medium Fan Speed Low Fan Speed LAN090HSV5 36 32 27 LAN120HSV5 38 34 29 LAN180HSV5 44 38 34 Art Cool Mirror™ Microphone Model No. Figure 5: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. LAN090HSV5 LAN120HSV5 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. LAN180HSV5 ART COOL MIRROR | 17 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Figure 6: LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Cooling Heating Figure 7: LAN180HSV5 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Cooling 18 | ART COOL MIRROR Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Heating MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Refrigerant Flow Diagram Figure 8: Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram. Th2 Vapor pipe connection port (flare connection) Heating Heat Th1 Exchanger Th4 Th5 Cooling M Cross Flow Fan Liquid pipe connection port (flare connection) Table 8: Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Sizes. Line Size Liquid Line Size Indoor Unit Capacity Vapor (in., OD) (in., OD) 9,000 Btu/h 12,000 Btu/h 18,000 Btu/h Ø3/8 Table 9: Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connections Vapor Line Liquid Line Indoor Unit Capacity Connection (in., OD) Connection (in., OD) 9,000 Btu/h Ø1/4 Ø1/2 12,000 Btu/h 18,000 Btu/h Ø3/8 Ø1/4 Ø5/8 Ø3/8 Table 10: Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. Location Description (Based on Cooling Mode) Th1 Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor Th2 Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor Th3 Evaporator Middle Temperature Thermistor Th4 Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor Th5 Water Level Sensor (Optional) IDU PCB Connector CN-TH1 CN-TH2 CN-TH3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL MIRROR | 19 Art Cool Mirror™ Thermistor for Indoor Air Temperature Th3 ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 9: Multi F Art Cool Mirror LAN090HSV5, LAN120HSV5, and LAN180HSV5 Indoor Units Wiring Diagram. 20 | ART COOL MIRROR Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Factory Supplied Parts and Materials Factory Supplied Parts Table 11: Parts Table. Part Quantity Installation Plate One (1) Image Btu/h Indoor Units 7,000 ~ 15,000and Btu/h Indoor Units 18,000 and 24,000 LAN090HSV5 LAN120HSV5 LAN180HSV5 Five (5) Type “B” Screws (M4 x 12L) Two (2) Wireless Handheld Controller with Holder AKB74955602 One (1) Art Cool Mirror™ Type “A” Screws Factory Supplied Materials • Owner’s Manual • Installation Manual Required Tools • • • • Level Screwdriver Electric drill Hole core drill • Flaring tool set • Spanner (Half union) • Thermometer WARNING Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death. Note: Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL MIRROR | 21 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices DANGER Select a location for installing the wall-mounted indoor unit (IDU) that meets the following conditions: • Where there is enough structural strength to bear the weight of the unit • Where air circulation will not be blocked • Where noise prevention is taken into consideration • Ensure there is sufficient space from the ceiling and floor • Locate the indoor unit in a location where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit/branch distribution unit • Include space for drainage to ensure condensate flows properly out of the unit when it is in cooling mode • Use a level indicator to ensure the unit is installed on a level plane Note: The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the following conditions: Do not install the unit where it will be subjected to direct thermal radiation from other heat sources. Do not install the unit in an area where combustible gas may generate, flow, stagnate, or leak. Do not install the unit in a location where acidic solution and spray (sulfur) are often used. Do not use the unit in environments where oil, steam, or sulfuric gas are present. Do not install additional ventilation products on the chassis of the unit. Do not install the unit near high-frequency generator sources. Figure 10:Minimum Clearance Requirements. Do not install the unit near a doorway. Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air >4 inches In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure: • Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees). • Add insulation between the floor joists. • Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor. ≥5 inches >4 inches Required Clearances Recommended height >6-1/2 feet from floor Figure 10 shows required clearance distances around a typical installed wall-mounted unit. Mounting the Installation Plate The mounting wall should be strong and solid enough to protect the unit from vibration. • Mount the installation plate on the wall using the Type “A” screws. If mounting the unit on concrete, consider using anchor bolts. • Always mount the installation plate horizontally. Measure the wall and mark the centerline using thread and a level. Figure 11:Installation Plate for LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 Units. Figure 12:Installation Plate for LAN180HSV5 Units. Unit Outline Place a level on raised tab Place a level on raised tab Unit Outline 18-1/8 inches 6-7/8 inches 3-3/4 inches 8-17/32 inches Right rear piping Installation Plate 5-1/4 inches Ø2-3/4 inches Installation Plate Left rear piping Measuring Tape | ART COOL MIRROR Ø2-3/4 inches Right rear piping 2-7/32 inches 2-23/32 inches 4-1/8 inches 22 22-7/16 inches Ø2-3/4 inches Ø2-3/4 inches Left rear piping Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual To avoid the possibility of fire, do not install the unit in an area where combustible gas may generate, flow, stagnate, or leak. Failure to do so will cause serious bodily injury or death. Before beginning installation, read the safety summary at the beginning of this manual. Measuring Tape Hanger Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 8-5/32 inches MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Drilling Piping Hole in the Wall Figure 19:Drilling Piping Hole Hanging the Indoor Unit Chassis WALL Indoor Core Drill Bushing Sleeve Figure 13:Locking the Indoor Unit onto the Installation Plate. Art Cool Mirror™ 1. Attach the three (3) hooks on the top of the indoor unit to the top edge of the installation plate. Verify the hooks are properly attached to the installation plate by gently shaking the indoor unit from side to side. 2. Unlock the tubing clamp from the indoor unit frame. For easier access between the bottom of the indoor unit and the wall, prop the clamp between the indoor unit frame and installation plate. 3. Remove the screw covers at the bottom of the indoor unit, unscrew the two (2) screws, remove the frame cover, remove the piping connection cover, and position the piping for installation (down, back, left, or right). Figure 14:Accessing the Back of the Indoor Unit. Outdoor (3/16"~5/16") Use caution when drilling holes through walls. Drilling into power wiring in the wall can cause serious bodily injury or death. Follow the left or right piping clearance recommendations in Figure 3 or Figure 4. 1. Using a 2-5/8 (ø 65mm) inch hole core drill bit, drill a hole at either the right or left side of the wall mounting. The hole should slant 3/16” to 5/16” from level (upward on the indoor unit side and downward on the outdoor unit side). 2. Finish off the newly drilled hole as shown with bushing and sleeve covering. Sleeve and bushing prevents damage to the tubing/bundling of the piping. Installation plate Figure 15:Removing the Frame Cover. Frame Cover Tubing Clamp Figure 16:Exterior Back View of Indoor Unit. Tubing Clamp Figure 17:Piping Installed to the Left. Connecting pipe Right Down Back Left Figure 18:Piping Installed to the Right. Tape Tape Connecting pipe Drain hose Drain hose Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL MIRROR | 23 ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices MULTI F MULTI F MAX • • • • • • • Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals. Confirm power source specifications. Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient. Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate. Confirm cable thickness specifications. It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist. Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor. • Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death. Note: • Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation. A voltage drop may cause the following problems: • Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device. • Compressor will not receive the proper starting current. Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable 1. Insert the power wiring/communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the bottom of the indoor unit. Figure 20:Connecting the Power Wiring / Communications Cable. 2. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit. 3. Secure the power wiring/communications cable with the cable restraint. Figure 21:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Connections—LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 models. Indoor Unit Terminal Block 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 or S 3 GND RD BR GRN / YLW Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) BL GND Figure 22:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Connections—LAN180HSV5 models. GND 24 Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) Indoor Unit Terminal Block 3 RD BL 1(L1 ) 2(L2) BR GRN / YLW Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines | ART COOL MIRROR 3 or S GND Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Terminal block Wired Remote Controller Terminal (Optional) Power wiring / communications cable Cable restraint MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Wireless Handheld Controller Figure 23:AKB74955602 Wireless Controller. Table 12: AKB74955602 Wireless Controller Functions. Screen Display * Art Cool Mirror™ * * RESET Buttons Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL MIRROR | 25 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Wired Controller Connections Indoor Unit Terminal Block To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX Systems Only) To Wired Controller Wired Controller Placement 1(L1 ) 2(L2) To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX Systems Only) Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature. • • • • • Do not install the wired controller near or in: Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners Hot or cold air from ducts Radiant heat from the sun or appliances Concealed pipes and chimneys An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall TEMP YES Remote Controlle r NO TEMP Rem ot e Cont roller NO Cooling Mode ↓ Auto Operation ↓ Dehumidification Mode ↓ Heating Mode | ART COOL MIRROR To Wired Controller Figure 26:Proper Location for the Wired Controller. Operation Mode Sequence 26 CN-REMO 3 BL BR GRN / YLW CN-REMO 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block GND RD BL 1(L1 ) 2(L2) BR GRN / YLW Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual GND Figure 25:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block—LAN180HSV5 models. RD Figure 24:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block—LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 models. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. TEMP Remote Controlle r 4 to 5 feet above the floor NO MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Hanging the Wired Controller 1. The controller wiring/cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring/cable on applicable side. Figure 27:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves. Top Top Back Right Side Right Side 2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself. 3. Arrange wiring/cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides. Figure 28:Attaching the Wall Plate. Installing the Controller Wall Wall Removing the Controller Wall Wall Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL MIRROR | 27 Art Cool Mirror™ 4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller. Do not damage the controller components when removing. Figure 29:Installing/Removing the Controller. ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNIT DATA ™ “Mechanical Specifications” on page 29 “General Data / Specifications” on page 30 “Dimensions” on page 31 “Cooling Capacity Table” on page 32 “Heating Capacity Table” on page 33 “Acoustic Data” on page 34 “Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution” on page 35 “Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 36 “Wiring Diagram” on page 37 “Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 38 “Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 39 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Mechanical Specifications and Features ART COOL Gallery Indoor Units General All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Art Cool Gallery indoor units have a sound rating no higher than 42 dB(A) as tested per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745. Coil Indoor unit coils are comprised of a minimum of two rows of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. The coils are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil. Refrigerant System Electrical Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power with voltage variances of ±10%. Casing Units are designed to mount on a vertical surface, and are shipped with a separate back plate that secures the unit to the wall, protruding no more than six (6) inches. Unit is designed so that refrigerant piping can be installed in one of four different directions. Cases / Finishes The Art Cool Gallery unit has a frame that can accommodate a 20" x 20" photograph, picture or artwork. Unit casing has a gray finish and is manufactured of heavy-duty acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) and high impact polystyrene (HIPS) plastic. Fan Assembly and Control The unit has a single, direct-drive, crossflow fan made of high strength ABS plastic. The fan motor is brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan/motor assembly is mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digitally controlled algorithm that provides pre-programmed, field-selectable fixed or auto fan speeds in the Heating and Cooling modes. For Art Cool Gallery units, the indoor fan has Low, Med, High, Power Cool and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the controller setpoint and space temperature. Also, the separate Chaos setting provides a simultaneous and random change in fan speed and flow Features • Inverter (Variable speed fan) • Chaos swing • Jet cool Figure 30: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit. Air Filter Return air is filtered with a factory-supplied, removable, washable pre-filter. Filter access is from the front of the unit without the use of tools. Airflow Guide Vanes Motorized oscillating guide vanes are factory installed, and allows the ability to control the direction of airflow from side to side. A motorized air sweep louver provides an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution. Microprocessor Control The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate mode. The microprocessor will also provide self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied fourwire power / communications cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit. Controls The indoor unit casing has a factory-standard, integral infrared sensor designed to communicate with the supplied LG wireless handheld remote controller. An optional LG supplied wired controller is available as an additional accessory. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable. Condensate The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate and includes a flexible drain hose capable of installation in one of two directions. Unit includes a connection that is compatible with the AquaGuard® AG-9300-LG condensate sensor. • Group control • Self-cleaning indoor coil • Auto operation / auto restart operation • 24-Hour on/off timer • Wireless LCD remote control included; wired thermostat available (sold separately) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL GALLERY™ | 29 Art Cool Gallery™ System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare. All refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be field insulated. direction at the discharge, simulating a natural outdoor breeze. MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX General Data / Specifications Table 13: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit General Data. Model Name Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h) 1 LMAN097HVP LMAN127HVP 9,000 11,200 10,400 13,300 57-77 57-77 59-81 59-81 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Operating Range Cooling (°F WB) Heating (°F DB) Fan Type Turbo Turbo Motor Output (W) x Qty. Motor/Drive Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) 24 x 1 24 x 1 Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct 272 / 208 / 155 314 / 258 / 198 R410A R410A EEV EEV 208-230, 1, 60 208-230, 1, 60 0.2 0.2 Unit Data Refrigerant Type2 Refrigerant Control Power Supply V, Ø, Hz 3 Rated Amps (A) Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L) 39 / 35 / 31 42 / 38 / 34 23-5/8 x 23-5/8 x 5-25/32 23-5/8 x 23-5/8 x 5-25/32 Net Unit Weight (lbs.) 32 32 Shipping Weight (lbs.) 37 37 Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)5 4 x 18 4 x 18 Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number (2 x 20 x 21) x 1 (2 x 20 x 21) x 1 Liquid (in.) 1/4 1/4 Vapor (in.) 3/8 3/8 Dimensions (W x H x D, in.) 4 Piping Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.) 27/32, 5/8 Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 2 This unit comes with a dry helium charge. 1 30 | ART COOL GALLERY™ 27/32, 5/8 Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V. 4 Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during operation. 5 All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Dimensions Figure 31: LMAN097HVP and LMAN127HVP Dimensions. Supply Air Vane Supply Air Supply Air Supply Air Vane Art Cool Gallery™ Supply Air Supply Air Vane Return Air Inlet Discharge Air Grille Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL GALLERY™ | 31 MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MAX MULTI FTable Cooling Capacity Table 14: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LMAN097HVP 9,000 LMAN127HVP 12,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC 8.82 8.82 8.81 8.80 8.80 8.79 8.78 8.78 8.77 8.76 8.76 8.75 8.54 8.33 8.12 7.91 7.68 7.50 7.31 7.12 6.94 6.82 6.79 10.98 10.97 10.96 10.95 10.95 10.94 10.93 10.92 10.91 10.90 10.90 10.89 10.63 10.36 10.10 9.84 9.56 9.33 9.10 8.86 8.63 8.49 8.44 5.68 5.72 5.77 5.81 5.85 5.90 5.94 5.99 6.03 6.07 6.12 6.16 6.06 5.96 5.85 5.74 5.68 5.52 5.37 5.19 5.03 5.00 4.98 7.06 7.12 7.17 7.23 7.28 7.34 7.39 7.45 7.50 7.56 7.61 7.67 7.54 7.41 7.27 7.14 7.06 6.87 6.68 6.46 6.26 6.22 6.20 73 / 61 TC SHC 9.37 9.36 9.36 9.35 9.34 9.33 9.33 9.32 9.31 9.31 9.30 9.29 9.08 8.87 8.66 8.45 8.22 8.03 7.84 7.66 7.47 7.36 7.32 11.66 11.65 11.64 11.63 11.63 11.62 11.61 11.60 11.59 11.58 11.57 11.56 11.30 11.04 10.77 10.51 10.23 10.00 9.76 9.53 9.30 9.16 9.11 6.00 6.04 6.09 6.14 6.18 6.23 6.28 6.32 6.37 6.42 6.46 6.51 6.41 6.31 6.20 6.09 6.04 5.89 5.73 5.55 5.39 5.36 5.35 7.46 7.52 7.58 7.64 7.69 7.75 7.81 7.87 7.92 7.98 8.04 8.10 7.97 7.85 7.72 7.58 7.51 7.32 7.13 6.90 6.71 6.67 6.65 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 9.92 9.91 9.90 9.90 9.89 9.88 9.87 9.87 9.86 9.85 9.84 9.84 9.62 9.41 9.20 8.99 8.75 8.57 8.38 8.19 8.01 7.89 7.86 12.34 12.33 12.32 12.31 12.31 12.30 12.29 12.28 12.27 12.26 12.25 12.24 11.97 11.71 11.45 11.18 10.89 10.66 10.43 10.20 9.96 9.82 9.78 5.81 5.85 5.90 5.94 5.99 6.03 6.08 6.12 6.17 6.21 6.26 6.30 6.21 6.12 6.03 5.93 5.88 5.74 5.60 5.43 5.29 5.26 5.25 7.22 7.28 7.34 7.39 7.45 7.51 7.56 7.62 7.67 7.73 7.78 7.84 7.73 7.62 7.50 7.38 7.32 7.15 6.97 6.76 6.58 6.54 6.53 10.31 10.31 10.30 10.29 10.28 10.27 10.27 10.26 10.25 10.24 10.24 10.23 10.01 9.80 9.59 9.37 9.00 8.88 8.77 8.58 8.39 8.28 8.24 12.84 12.83 12.82 12.81 12.80 12.79 12.78 12.77 12.76 12.75 12.74 12.73 12.46 12.19 11.93 11.67 11.20 11.05 10.91 10.68 10.44 10.30 10.26 5.93 5.98 6.02 6.07 6.11 6.16 6.21 6.25 6.30 6.34 6.39 6.43 6.35 6.26 6.17 6.07 5.94 5.85 5.76 5.58 5.44 5.42 5.41 7.38 7.43 7.49 7.55 7.61 7.66 7.72 7.78 7.83 7.89 7.95 8.01 7.90 7.79 7.67 7.56 7.39 7.28 7.16 6.95 6.77 6.74 6.73 86 / 72 TC SHC 11.01 11.01 11.00 10.99 10.98 10.97 10.96 10.96 10.95 10.94 10.93 10.92 10.71 10.49 10.28 10.06 9.83 9.64 9.45 9.26 9.08 8.96 8.93 13.71 13.70 13.69 13.68 13.66 13.65 13.64 13.63 13.62 13.61 13.60 13.59 13.32 13.05 12.79 12.52 12.23 11.99 11.76 11.53 11.30 11.16 11.11 5.98 6.03 6.07 6.12 6.17 6.21 6.26 6.30 6.35 6.40 6.44 6.49 6.41 6.33 6.24 6.16 6.12 5.99 5.86 5.69 5.56 5.54 5.53 7.44 7.50 7.55 7.61 7.67 7.73 7.79 7.84 7.90 7.96 8.02 8.07 7.97 7.87 7.77 7.66 7.62 7.45 7.29 7.08 6.91 6.89 6.88 90 / 75 TC SHC 11.56 11.55 11.54 11.54 11.53 11.52 11.51 11.50 11.49 11.48 11.47 11.47 11.25 11.03 10.82 10.60 10.36 10.17 9.99 9.80 9.61 9.50 9.46 14.39 14.38 14.37 14.36 14.34 14.33 14.32 14.31 14.30 14.29 14.28 14.27 14.00 13.73 13.46 13.19 12.89 12.66 12.43 12.19 11.96 11.82 11.78 6.09 6.14 6.19 6.23 6.28 6.33 6.38 6.42 6.47 6.52 6.56 6.61 6.54 6.46 6.38 6.30 6.27 6.14 6.01 5.85 5.71 5.70 5.69 7.58 7.64 7.70 7.76 7.82 7.87 7.93 7.99 8.05 8.11 8.17 8.23 8.13 8.04 7.94 7.83 7.80 7.64 7.48 7.27 7.11 7.09 7.08 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. 32 | ART COOL GALLERY™ Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 15: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LMAN097HVP 9,000 64 TC Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 TC TC °F DB °F WB 61 TC 72 TC 75 TC 0 -0.4 5.35 5.28 5.23 5 4.5 6.03 5.95 5.90 5.20 5.12 4.90 5.88 5.80 10 9 6.71 6.63 5.58 6.58 6.56 6.48 17 15 7.61 6.26 7.54 7.49 7.46 7.39 20 19 7.14 7.95 7.88 7.83 7.80 7.72 25 7.46 23 8.52 8.44 8.39 8.37 8.29 7.99 30 28 9.01 8.93 8.88 8.86 8.78 8.52 35 32 9.50 9.42 9.37 9.34 9.27 9.04 40 36 9.94 9.86 9.81 9.78 9.71 9.48 45 41 10.37 10.30 10.25 10.22 10.15 9.92 47 43 10.55 10.48 10.43 10.40 10.32 10.10 50 46 10.72 10.64 10.59 10.57 10.49 10.24 55 51 11.00 10.93 10.88 10.85 10.78 10.48 60 56 11.00 10.93 10.88 10.85 10.78 10.52 63 59 11.00 10.93 10.88 10.85 10.78 10.55 68 64 11.00 10.93 10.88 10.85 10.78 10.60 0 -0.4 6.84 6.75 6.68 6.65 6.55 6.26 5 4.5 7.71 7.61 7.55 7.52 7.42 7.13 10 9 8.58 8.48 8.42 8.38 8.29 8.00 17 15 9.73 9.64 9.57 9.54 9.44 9.14 20 19 10.17 10.07 10.01 9.98 9.88 9.54 25 23 10.89 10.79 10.73 10.70 10.60 10.22 30 28 11.52 11.42 11.36 11.32 11.23 10.89 35 32 12.14 12.05 11.98 11.95 11.85 11.57 40 36 12.71 12.61 12.55 12.51 12.42 12.13 45 41 13.27 13.17 13.11 13.08 12.98 12.69 47 43 13.49 13.40 13.33 13.30 13.20 12.91 50 46 13.71 13.61 13.55 13.52 13.42 13.10 55 51 14.07 13.97 13.91 13.88 13.78 13.40 60 56 14.07 13.97 13.91 13.88 13.78 13.46 63 59 14.07 13.97 13.91 13.88 13.78 13.49 68 64 14.07 13.97 13.91 13.88 13.78 13.55 Art Cool Gallery™ LMAN127HVP 12,000 Outdoor Air Temp. TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL GALLERY™ | 33 MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MAX MULTI F Data Acoustic • Measurement taken 2.6′ below the bottom of the unit and at a distance of 3.3′ from face of unit. • Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full load normal operating condition. • Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is installed. • Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3. • Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745. 3.3ft Table 16: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]). 2.6ft Model No. Microphone Figure 33: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. LMAN097HVP 80 70 70 NC-65 60 NC-60 NC-55 50 NC-50 NC-45 40 NC-40 NC-35 30 NC-30 NC-25 20 Approximate Hearing Threshold 10 63 NC-15 250 500 1000 2000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 4000 High Fan Speed Medium Fan Speed Low Fan Speed LMAN097HVP 39 35 31 LMAN127HVP 42 38 34 8000 NC-65 60 NC-60 NC-55 50 NC-50 NC-45 40 NC-40 NC-35 30 NC-30 NC-25 20 Approximate Hearing Threshold NC-20 125 Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating) LMAN127HVP 80 Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 32: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. 10 63 NC-20 NC-15 125 250 500 1000 2000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 4000 8000 s 34 | ART COOL GALLERY™ Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Figure 34: LMAN097HVP Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Cooling Discharge angle: 40° Discharge angle: 50° Heating Air velocity [ft/s] Air velocity [ft/s] 9f t 9f t 7f t 7f t 6.6 6.6 16ft 13ft 10ft 4.9 3.3 1.6 7 ft 3f t 3f t 4.6 3f t 0f t 0f t 3.3 1.6 16ft 13ft 10ft 7 ft 3f t 0f t 0f t Temperature [°F] Temperature [°F] 9f t 7f t 7f t 52 Art Cool Gallery™ 9f t 109 55 3f t 3f t 106 16ft 13ft 59 63 66 10ft 7 ft 3f t 0f t 0f t 91 16ft 13ft 10ft Figure 35: LMAN127HVP Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Cooling Discharge angle : 40° 102 99 7 ft 3f t 0f t Air velocity [ft/s] 9f t 9f t 7f t 7f t 8.2 6.6 6.6 3f t 3f t 4.9 3.3 1.6 16ft 13ft 0f t Heating Discharge angle : 50° Air velocity [ft/s] 95 10f t 7 ft 3f t 0f t 0f t Temperature [°F] 3.3 1.6 16ft 13ft 10f t 7 ft 4.9 3f t 0f t 0f t Temperature [°F] 9f t 9f t 7f t 7f t 52 11 3 109 55 3f t 59 3f t 106 63 66 16ft 13ft 10f t 7 ft 3f t 0f t 0f t 91 16ft 13ft 10f t Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 95 7 ft 99 102 3f t 0f t 0f t ART COOL GALLERY™ | 35 MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MULTIDiagram F MAX Refrigerant Flow Figure 36: Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram. Gas pipe connection port (flare connection) Cooling Heating M Thermistor for Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor for Evaporator Outlet Temperature Turbo Fan Thermistor for Evaporator Inlet Temperature Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Heat Exchanger Liquid pipe connection port (flare connection) Table 17: Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters. Model No. LMAN097HVP LMAN127HVP Vapor (inch) Liquid (inch) Ø3/8 Ø1/4 Table 18: Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. Description (Based on Cooling Mode) Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor 36 PCB Connector CN-TH1 Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor CN-TH2 Water Level Sensor (Optional) CN-TH3 | ART COOL GALLERY™ Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Figure 37: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Units Wiring Diagram. Art Cool Gallery™ Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL GALLERY™ | 37 MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MULTIMaterials F MAX Factory Supplied Parts and Factory Supplied Parts Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Table 19: Parts Table. Part Quantity Installation Guide One (1) Type “A” Screws and Plastic Anchors Four (4) Each Type “B” Screws (M4 x 12L) Two (2) Wireless Handheld Controller with Holder (AKB73635607) One (1) Factory Supplied Materials • Owner’s Manual • Installation Manual Image Required Tools • • • • Level Screwdriver Electric drill Hole core drill • Flaring tool set • Spanner (Half union) • Thermometer WARNING Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death. Note: Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation. 38 | ART COOL GALLERY™ Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Selecting the Best Location Figure 38:Minimum Clearance Requirements. Do’s • • • • • • Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked. Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily. Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration. Ensure there is sufficient space from the ceiling and floor. Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space. Locate the indoor unit in a location where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit/branch distribution unit. Don’ts • • • • >8 inches >20 inches >20 inches Recommended height >5 feet from the floor Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used. Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored. Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators. Do not install the unit near a doorway. The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed. Figure 39:Using the Installation Guide. In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure: • Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees). • Add insulation between the floor joists. • Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor. Using the Installation Guide 1. Choose an appropriate location for the indoor unit. To hang the installation guide, verify that it is level and plumb, and then tape it to the wall. Horizontal 1 2 2. Drill four (4) 1/4-inch diameter holes with a depth of 1-3/16 to 1-3/8 inches for the mounting screws. Drill one (1) two (2) inch-diameter hole for the field-installed refrigerant and drain piping. 3. Insert a plastic anchor into each of the mounting holes. 3 4. Screw the top two (2) screws into the wall. Do not flush them to the wall; leave a 7/16 inch space for hanging the indoor unit. Note: If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components. Plastic Anchor 4 6 7/1 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. h inc ART COOL GALLERY™ | 39 Art Cool Gallery™ Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Preparing the Indoor Unit for Installation Removing the Front Panel Figure 40:Preparing for Installation. 1A 1B 2A 2B 1. First pull the top of the front panel up (1A) and then out (1B). Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual 2. Remove the two (2) screws at the bottom (2A), then lift off the front panel (2B). 3. To completely detach the front panel, disconnect the panel connector found at the top of the indoor unit (3). 3 Panel Connector Figure 41:Removing the Piping and Side Covers. Removing the Piping and Side Covers 1. Unscrew the center cover. 2. Remove the cover from the side of the indoor unit chosen for the piping connections, and then knock out the piping access hole. If the refrigerant piping will be connected through the back of the unit, the access hole does not need to be knocked out. Access Hole for Piping 3. Remove any burrs that may have been made. Side cover Figure 42:Preparing the Drain Hose. Preparing the Drain Hose 1. Remove the rubber stopper from the chosen side of the indoor unit. 2. Insert the drain hose into the handle of the drain pan. 3. Connect the drain hose to the field-installed drain piping. Adhesive Drain Hose 40 | ART COOL GALLERY™ Choose a Side for the Drain Connections Field-Installed Drain Piping Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Rubber Stopper MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Preparing the Refrigerant and Drain Piping Connections Figure 43:Preparing the Refrigerant / Drain Connections. 1. Depending on the installation requirements, route the indoor unit refrigerant piping and the drain hose to the left, right (see guidelines below), or rear of the frame. 1 2. Bundle the piping and drain hose with tape where they meet near the indoor unit frame. Position the drain hose at the bottom of the bundle (positioning the drain hose at the top of the bundle may cause the drain pan to overflow inside the indoor unit). Installing Piping on the Right Side of the Indoor Unit Frame 1. Press on the top of the clamp, and then slowly guide the piping downward. Drain hose Figure 44:Right Side Piping Access. 1 2 2. Bend the piping to the right side of the indoor unit frame. 2 Do not bend the piping/drain hose from side to side; it may damage the components. Power wiring / Communication cable Connecting pipe Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame 1. Remove the installation guide and hang the indoor unit on the top two (2) screws. Verify the indoor unit is hanging securely on the screws. 2. Align the holes at the bottom of the indoor unit to the mounting holes. Tighten first the top screws, then tighten the bottom screws. 3. Verify that the indoor unit is completely secured to the wall by gently shaking it up and down. Tape Drain hose Figure 45:Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame. 1 Insta llation Guid e Holes for Hanging (On back of indoor unit) 2 Plastic Anchors 3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL GALLERY™ | 41 Art Cool Gallery™ Loop MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Connecting the Indoor Unit Piping to the Field-Installed Piping 1. Center align the indoor unit piping (refrigerant and drain) and the field-installed piping, then hand tighten the flare nut. 2. Tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench. 3. Attach the drain tube piping to the indoor unit drain hose as shown below. Figure 46:Indoor Unit to Field-Installed Piping Connection. Indoor unit piping Flare nut Drain extension If the drain hose is routed inside a room, add insulation to prevent condensation from forming. Indoor unit drain hose Adhesive Field-installed piping Spanner Narrow tape Flare nut Field-installed piping Torque wrench Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched. Refrigerant Piping Insulation Figure 48:Insulating the Piping. Bands Insulation 1. Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit piping connections). Any exposed piping may generate condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F. Field-supplied piping Drain Piping Insulation Drain piping must have insulation a minimum of 7/32 inches thick. Wide tape Wrap with tape Indoor unit piping Installing the Insulation 1. Overlap the insulation at the connection of the field-installed piping and the indoor unit piping. Tape together so there are no gaps. 2. Secure insulation to the rear piping housing section with vinyl tape. 3. Bundle the piping and drain hose with tape where they meet at the back of the indoor unit frame. Position the drain hose at the bottom of the bundle (positioning the drain hose at the top of the bundle may cause the drain pan to overflow inside the indoor unit). Drain Slope Drain hose should point down so water can flow away easily. Figure 49:Drain Piping Slope. Slope Down Checking the Drainage System 1. Pour water on the indoor unit evaporator. 2. 3. Wrap with tape Piping Drain hose 2. Ensure the water flows through and out of the hose and away from the indoor unit without leaking. s Drain extension 42 | ART COOL GALLERY™ Piping Narrow tape Figure 50:Checking the Drainage System. Indoor Unit Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 47:Extending the Drain Hose. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Wide tape MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines • • • • • • • Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals. Confirm power source specifications. Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient. Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate. Confirm cable thickness specifications. It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist. Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor. • Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death. Note: Art Cool Gallery™ • Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation. A voltage drop may cause the following problems: • Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device. • Compressor will not receive the proper starting current. Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable 1. Insert the power wiring/communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the access hole of the indoor unit (ground wire should be longer than the other wires/cables). Unscrew the control board cover. Figure 51:Connecting the Power Wiring / Communications Cable. 2. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit. Control Board Cover 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 3. Secure the power wiring/communications cable to the control board. 4. Reattach the control board cover. Lock nut (field supplied) Figure 52:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Connections—LMAN097HVP and LMAN127HVP models. Indoor Unit Terminal Block 2(L2) 3 RD BL 1(L1) BR GRN / YLW GND Conduit (field supplied) Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) 3 or S GND Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL GALLERY™ | 43 MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Controller Options Art Cool Gallery wall-mounted indoor units include a handheld controller (AKB73635607), but optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Wireless Handheld Controller Figure 53:AKB73635607 Wireless Controller. Table 20: AKB73635607 Wireless Controller Functions. Control Panel Button Display Screen Description Air circulation button1: Circulates the room air without operating in cooling or heating mode. Display Screen Sleep Mode Auto Button1: Sets the sleep mode auto operation. Temperature Adjustment Buttons: Raises or lowers temperature setpoint in cooling and heating operation. On / Off Button: Turns the power on/off. Indoor Fan Speed Button: Changes the fan speed. Control Panel Operation mode selection button1: Selects the operation mode. Cooling operation / Auto operation or auto changeover / Dehumidifying operation / Heating operation Jet Cool / Jet Heat Button1: Warms up or cools down the indoor temperature within a short period. Air Flow Direction Button: Adjusts the airflow direction. Temperature Display Button: Displays the room temperature. Press and hold button down for five (5) seconds to change from °C to °F. Operation Mode Sequence Cooling Mode ↓ Auto Operation ↓ Dehumidification Mode ↓ Heating Mode Timer button: Sets the current time and the start/end times. Navigation/Functions Button1: Adjusts the time and sets the special functions. Auto clean / Operates energy saving cooling / Adjusts the brightness of the indoor unit display Set/Clear Button: Sets or cancels functions. Reset Button: Resets the air conditioner settings. 1 44 | ART COOL GALLERY™ Depending on the indoor unit model, some functions may not be supported. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Wired Controller Connections Figure 54:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block. Indoor Unit Terminal Block CN-REMO 3 RD BL 1(L1 ) 2(L2) BR GRN / YLW GND To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX Systems Only) Wired Controller Placement Figure 55:Proper Location for the Wired Controller. To Wired Controller Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature. YES NO Do not install the wired controller near or in: Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners Hot or cold air from ducts Radiant heat from the sun or appliances Concealed pipes and chimneys An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall 4 to 5 feet above the floor TEMP Rem ot e Cont TEMP Remote Controlle r roller Art Cool Gallery™ • • • • • TEMP Remote Controlle r NO NO Figure 56:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves. Hanging the Wired Controller 1. The controller wiring/cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring/cable on applicable side. Top Top Back Right Side Right Side 2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself. 3. Arrange wiring/cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides. Figure 57:Attaching the Wall Plate. 4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller. Do not damage the controller components when removing. Figure 58:Installing/Removing the Controller. Installing the Controller Wall Removing the Controller Wall Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Wall ART COOL GALLERY™ Wall | 45 MULTI F ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described. Finalizing Indoor Unit Installation 1. Verify that the side covers are closed or opened, depending on installation requirements. Place the power wiring / communications cable in the bottom groove along the left side of the frame. Figure 59:Final Installation Step—Reattaching the Front Panel. 1 2 2. Reconnect the panel connector found at the top of the indoor unit. Front Panel Connector 3. Attach the top part of the front panel, then position its tabs in the grooves on the bottom part of the indoor unit frame. 4. To ensure the front panel tabs are securely positioned in the grooves, adjust the panel by loosening or tightening the screws at the bottom. 46 | ART COOL GALLERY™ 3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 4 MULTI F MULTI F MAX Art Cool Gallery™ Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ART COOL GALLERY™ | 47 STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNIT DATA “Mechanical Specifications” on page 49 “General Data / Specifications” on page 50 “Dimensions” on page 51 “Cooling Capacity Table” on page 53 “Heating Capacity Table” on page 56 “Acoustic Data” on page 58 “Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution” on page 60 “Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 62 “Wiring Diagram” on page 63 “Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 65 “Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 66 MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Mechanical Specifications and Features Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Figure 60: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit. General All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Standard WallMounted units have a sound rating no higher than 46 dB(A) as tested per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745. Coil Indoor unit coils are comprised of a minimum of two rows of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. The coils are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil. Refrigerant System Electrical The indoor units require 208–230Vac/60Hz/1Φ power with voltage variance of no more than ±10%. Casing The units mount on a vertical surface. They are shipped with a separate back plate that secures the unit to the wall, protruding no more than nine (9) inches. Refrigerant piping can be installed in one (1) of four (4) different directions. Finish The Standard Wall-Mounted unit has a curved architectural panel with a pearl white finish. Unit casing has a pearl white or dark gray finish and is manufactured of heavy-duty acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) and high impact polystyrene (HIPS) plastic. Fan Assembly and Control The unit has a single, direct-drive, crossflow fan made of high strength ABS plastic. The fan motor is brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digitally controlled algorithm that provides pre-programmed, field-selectable fixed or auto fan speeds in the Heating and Cooling modes. For Standard Wall-Mounted units, the indoor fan has Low, Med, High, Jet Cool, and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High, Jet Heat, and Auto settings for Heating mode. The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the controller setpoint and space temperature. Also, the separate Chaos setting provides a simultaneous and random change in fan speed and flow direction at the discharge, simulating a natural outdoor breeze. Features • • • • Inverter (Variable speed fan) Comfort Air 3M filter Jet cool/Jet Heat • • • • The return air inlet has a factory-supplied primary removable, washable filter. The unit is also equipped with a secondary 3M Micro Dust filter. Filters are accessed from the front of the unit without the use of tools. Airflow Guide Vanes A factory-installed motorized guide vane controls the direction of airflow from side to side. A motorized louver provides an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down for uniform air distribution. Microprocessor Control The indoor unit has an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate mode. The microprocessor also provides self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power / communications cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit. Controls The indoor unit casing has a factory-standard, integral infrared sensor to communicate with the supplied LG wireless handheld remote controller. An optional LG supplied wired controller is available as an additional accessory. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable. The indoor unit has built-in wi-fi and can be controlled with LG’s SmartThinQ app on a smart device. A field-supplied wi-fi network and smart device are required. The SmartThinQ app is free and is available for Android and iOS smart devices. Condensate The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate and includes a flexible drain hose capable of installation in one of two directions. The unit also includes a connection that is compatible with the AquaGuard® AG-9300-LG condensate sensor. Group control Self-cleaning indoor coil Auto operation Auto restart operation • • • • Built-in wi-fi Dehumidifying function Self-diagnostic function Wireless LCD remote control included Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 49 Standard Wall-Mounted The system is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare. All refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be field insulated. Air Filter MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS General Data / Specifications Table 21: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit General Data. Model Name Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h) 1 LMN079HVT LSN090HSV5 LSN120HSV5 LMN159HVT LSN180HSV5 LMN249HVT 7,000 9,000 12,000 14,300 18,000 24,000 8,100 10,900 13,600 15,600 21,600 25,600 Operating Range Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Cooling (°F WB) Heating (°F DB) 57-77 59-81 Fan Type Cross Flow Motor Output (W) x Qty. Motor/Drive Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) 30 x 1 60 x 1 Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct 254 / 204 / 148 268 / 218 / 169 282 / 233 / 177 314 / 268 / 184 558 / 438 / 353 597 / 452 / 367 44 / 38 / 34 46 / 41 / 36 Unit Data Refrigerant Type2 R410A Refrigerant Control Power Supply V, Ø, Hz EEV 208-230, 1, 60 3 Rated Amps (A) Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L)4 0.4 35 / 31 / 26 36 / 32 / 27 38 / 34 / 29 42 / 38 / 32 32-15/16 x 12-1/8 x 7-7/16 39-9/32 x 13-19/32 x 8-9/32 Net Unit Weight (lbs.) 18.3 25.6 Shipping Weight (lbs.) 23.4 32.2 Dimensions (W x H x D, in.) Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)5 Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number 4 x 18 (2 x 23 x 22) x 1 (2 x 16 x 20) x 1 Pipe Size Liquid (in.) 1/4 Vapor (in.) 3/8 1/2 Connection Size Liquid (in.) 1/4 3/8 1/4 Vapor (in.) 3/8 5/8 1/2 Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.) 27/32, 5/8 Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 2 This unit comes with a dry helium charge. 1 50 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V. Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during operation. 5 All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 3 4 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Dimensions MULTI F MULTI F MAX Figure 61: LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, and LMN159HVT Dimensions. 1-7/16 (33.5) Display & Remote Controller Signal Receiver Bottom Rear Right 2 (51) 7-7/16 (189) Air Intake Air Outlet Refrigerant, Drain Pipe and Cable Routing Knock Out Hole 5/16 (8) Terminal Block for Power Supply and Communication Approx. 11-11/32 (288) to gas pipe 12-1/8 (308) Refrigerant, Drain Approx. 8-19/32 (218) to liquid pipe Pipe and Cable Routing Knock Out Hole Drain Hose Connection 3-21/32 (93) Ø2-9/16 (65) 5-19/32 (142) 3-27/32 (98) 5-31/32 (152) 1-1/2 (38) 12-1/16 (306) 32-15/16 (837) Installation Plate Unit Outline 32-15/16 (837) Fixing the Installation Plate, Drilling Hole 29/32 (23) Unit Outline Connecting Gas/Liquid Pipe 3-11/16 (94) Ø2-9/16 (65) 7-27/32 (199) 5-9/32 (134) 7-5/8 (194) In Case of Left Side Piping 5-3/16 (132) 51 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Standard Wall-Mounted 30-3/16 (767) Air Intake Hole 32-15/16 (837) [28-5/32 (715)] Air Outlet Hole 2-3/8 (60) 3-5/8 (92) 55° Left & Right 55° 2-15/32 (63) Rear Left Decoration Cover Up & Down Heating * If airflow direction control is available, Cooling 15° 29/32 (23) Unit : Inch (mm) Refrigerant, Drain Pipe and Cable Routing Knock Out Hole 2 (51) 1-1/4 (31) 2-7/16 ( 61.5) 1-3/32 (50.2) 1-1/16 (26.2) 1/4 (6) x 1/8 (3) 1/8 (3) x 1/4 (6) 15° 45° 85° 11/32 (9) 2-15/32 (63) 12-1/8 (308) 12-1/8 (308) 2-7/32(56) 10-11/32 (263) 2-17/32 (64) 1-27/32(47) 2-5/16 (59) [5-29/32 (150)] Air Intake Hole 2 Air -7/32 Ou (5 tlet 6) Ho le 5/8 (15.3) 1-9/32 (32.7) 2-13/32 (61) 2-7/32 (56) 5-31/32 (152) Air Outlet 8-9/32 (210) Air Intake 7/16 (11) 2-3/8 (60) Refrigerant, Drain Pipe and Cable Routing Knock Out Hole Approx. 9-7/16 (240) to gas pipe Approx. 6-5/16 (160) to liquid pipe Drain Hose Connection 4-17/32 (115) 5-29/32 (150) Ø2-9/16 (65) 3-9/32 (83) 5-9/32 (134) 14-11/16 (373) 39-9/32 (998) Installation Plate Unit Outline 39-9/32 (998) Unit Outline Connecting Gas/Liquid Pipe 5-13/32 (137) Ø2-9/16 (65) 7-13/32 (188) 3-9/32 (83) 5-29/32 (150) 6-15/32 (164) In case of Left Side Piping Fixing the Installation Plate, Drilling Hole 1-1/16 (27) Rear Right Bottom Terminal Block for Power Supply and Communication Refrigerant, Drain Pipe and Cable Routing Knock Out Hole 1-15/32 (37) 2-23/32 (69) [36-5/32 (918)] Air Intake Hole 50° 13-19/32 (345) Rear Left 39-9/32 (998) Display & Remote Controller Signal Receiver [34-11/32 (872)] Air Outlet Hole 2-1/4 (57) 3-17/32 (90) 2-7/32 (56) Left & Right 50° 1-1/16 (27) [6-11/16 (170)] Air Intake Hole 1-7/16 (33.5) Decoration Cover Up & Down Heating * If airflow direction control is available, Cooling 20° 2-3/8 (60) 2-3/32 (53) 11-13/16 (300) 2-15/32 (63) Unit : Inch (mm) Refrigerant, Drain Pipe and Cable Routing Knock Out Hole 2-3/8 (60) 1-1/4 (31) 2-7/16 ( 61.5) 1-3/32 (50.2) 1-1/16 (26.2) 1/4 (6) x 1/8 (3) 1/8 (3) x 1/4 (6) 15° 45° 85° Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. | STD. WALL-MOUNTED 52 7/16(11) 2-3/32 (53) 13-19/32 (345) 13-19/32 (345) 2-3/8 (60) 5-31/32 (152) [2 Air -29/ Ou 32 ( tlet 74 Ho )] le 5/8 (15.3) 1-9/32 (32.7) 2-13/32 (61) Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Dimensions MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Figure 62: LSN180HSV5 and LMN249HVT Dimensions. MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 22: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LMN079HVT 7,000 73 / 61 TC SHC Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 6.86 6.86 6.85 6.85 6.84 6.84 6.83 6.83 6.82 6.81 6.81 6.80 6.64 6.48 6.31 6.15 5.98 5.83 5.69 5.54 5.39 5.31 5.28 8.82 8.82 8.81 8.80 8.80 8.79 8.78 8.78 8.77 8.76 8.76 8.75 8.54 8.33 8.12 7.91 7.68 7.50 7.31 7.12 6.94 6.82 6.79 7.29 7.28 7.28 7.27 7.27 7.26 7.25 7.25 7.24 7.24 7.23 7.23 7.06 6.90 6.73 6.57 6.39 6.25 6.10 5.96 5.81 5.72 5.69 9.37 9.36 9.36 9.35 9.34 9.33 9.33 9.32 9.31 9.31 9.30 9.29 9.08 8.87 8.66 8.45 8.22 8.03 7.84 7.66 7.47 7.36 7.32 7.71 7.71 7.70 7.70 7.69 7.68 7.68 7.67 7.67 7.66 7.66 7.65 7.48 7.32 7.15 6.99 6.81 6.66 6.52 6.37 6.23 6.14 6.11 9.92 9.91 9.90 9.90 9.89 9.88 9.87 9.87 9.86 9.85 9.84 9.84 9.62 9.41 9.20 8.99 8.75 8.57 8.38 8.19 8.01 7.89 7.86 4.68 4.72 4.76 4.79 4.83 4.87 4.90 4.94 4.97 5.01 5.05 5.08 5.00 4.91 4.82 4.73 4.68 4.56 4.43 4.28 4.15 4.12 4.11 6.04 6.09 6.13 6.18 6.23 6.28 6.32 6.37 6.42 6.46 6.51 6.56 6.45 6.34 6.22 6.10 6.04 5.88 5.72 5.52 5.36 5.32 5.30 4.95 4.99 5.02 5.06 5.10 5.14 5.18 5.22 5.25 5.29 5.33 5.37 5.29 5.20 5.12 5.03 4.98 4.86 4.73 4.58 4.45 4.42 4.41 6.38 6.43 6.48 6.53 6.58 6.63 6.68 6.73 6.78 6.83 6.88 6.92 6.82 6.71 6.60 6.48 6.43 6.26 6.10 5.90 5.74 5.70 5.69 4.79 4.83 4.86 4.90 4.94 4.98 5.01 5.05 5.09 5.12 5.16 5.20 5.13 5.05 4.97 4.89 4.85 4.74 4.62 4.48 4.36 4.34 4.33 6.18 6.23 6.27 6.32 6.37 6.42 6.47 6.51 6.56 6.61 6.66 6.70 6.61 6.51 6.41 6.31 6.26 6.11 5.96 5.78 5.63 5.60 5.59 8.02 8.02 8.01 8.00 8.00 7.99 7.99 7.98 7.97 7.97 7.96 7.95 7.79 7.62 7.46 7.29 7.00 6.91 6.82 6.67 6.53 6.44 6.41 10.31 10.31 10.30 10.29 10.28 10.27 10.27 10.26 10.25 10.24 10.24 10.23 10.01 9.80 9.59 9.37 9.00 8.88 8.77 8.58 8.39 8.28 8.24 4.89 4.93 4.97 5.01 5.04 5.08 5.12 5.16 5.19 5.23 5.27 5.31 5.24 5.16 5.09 5.01 4.90 4.82 4.75 4.61 4.49 4.47 4.46 6.31 6.36 6.41 6.46 6.50 6.55 6.60 6.65 6.70 6.75 6.80 6.85 6.75 6.66 6.56 6.46 6.32 6.22 6.12 5.94 5.79 5.76 5.76 TC 86 / 72 SHC 8.57 8.56 8.55 8.55 8.54 8.53 8.53 8.52 8.51 8.51 8.50 8.49 8.33 8.16 7.99 7.83 7.64 7.50 7.35 7.21 7.06 6.97 6.94 11.01 11.01 11.00 10.99 10.98 10.97 10.96 10.96 10.95 10.94 10.93 10.92 10.71 10.49 10.28 10.06 9.83 9.64 9.45 9.26 9.08 8.96 8.93 4.93 4.97 5.01 5.05 5.09 5.12 5.16 5.20 5.24 5.28 5.31 5.35 5.29 5.22 5.15 5.08 5.05 4.94 4.83 4.70 4.58 4.57 4.56 6.36 6.41 6.46 6.51 6.56 6.61 6.66 6.71 6.76 6.81 6.85 6.90 6.82 6.73 6.64 6.55 6.52 6.37 6.23 6.06 5.91 5.89 5.89 TC 90 / 75 SHC 8.99 8.99 8.98 8.97 8.97 8.96 8.95 8.94 8.94 8.93 8.92 8.92 8.75 8.58 8.41 8.24 8.06 7.91 7.77 7.62 7.48 7.39 7.36 11.56 11.55 11.54 11.54 11.53 11.52 11.51 11.50 11.49 11.48 11.47 11.47 11.25 11.03 10.82 10.60 10.36 10.17 9.99 9.80 9.61 9.50 9.46 5.03 5.06 5.10 5.14 5.18 5.22 5.26 5.30 5.34 5.38 5.42 5.45 5.39 5.33 5.26 5.19 5.17 5.06 4.96 4.82 4.71 4.70 4.70 6.48 6.53 6.58 6.63 6.68 6.73 6.78 6.83 6.88 6.93 6.98 7.03 6.96 6.87 6.79 6.70 6.67 6.53 6.39 6.22 6.08 6.06 6.06 Standard Wall-Mounted LSN090HSV5 9,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 53 STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MULTI F MAX Cooling Capacity Table Table 23: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table (continued). Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LSN120HSV5 12,000 LMN159HVT 14,300 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC 11.76 11.75 11.75 11.74 11.73 11.72 11.71 11.70 11.69 11.68 11.67 11.66 11.38 11.10 10.83 10.55 10.25 10.00 9.75 9.50 9.25 9.10 9.05 14.02 14.01 14.00 13.99 13.98 13.96 13.95 13.94 13.93 13.92 13.91 13.90 13.57 13.23 12.90 12.57 12.21 11.91 11.61 11.32 11.02 10.84 10.78 8.51 8.57 8.64 8.71 8.77 8.84 8.90 8.97 9.03 9.10 9.17 9.23 9.08 8.92 8.76 8.60 8.51 8.28 8.05 7.77 7.54 7.49 7.47 10.23 10.31 10.39 10.47 10.55 10.62 10.70 10.78 10.86 10.94 11.02 11.10 10.92 10.73 10.53 10.33 10.23 9.95 9.68 9.35 9.07 9.00 8.98 73 / 61 TC SHC 12.49 12.48 12.48 12.47 12.46 12.45 12.44 12.43 12.42 12.41 12.40 12.39 12.11 11.82 11.54 11.26 10.96 10.71 10.46 10.21 9.96 9.81 9.76 14.89 14.88 14.87 14.85 14.84 14.83 14.82 14.81 14.80 14.79 14.78 14.76 14.43 14.09 13.76 13.42 13.06 12.76 12.46 12.17 11.87 11.69 11.63 8.99 9.06 9.13 9.20 9.27 9.34 9.41 9.47 9.54 9.61 9.68 9.75 9.60 9.45 9.29 9.13 9.05 8.82 8.59 8.31 8.08 8.03 8.01 10.80 10.89 10.97 11.06 11.14 11.22 11.31 11.39 11.47 11.56 11.64 11.72 11.55 11.36 11.17 10.98 10.88 10.60 10.33 10.00 9.71 9.66 9.64 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 13.22 13.21 13.20 13.19 13.18 13.17 13.16 13.15 13.14 13.13 13.12 13.11 12.83 12.55 12.26 11.98 11.67 11.42 11.17 10.92 10.67 10.52 10.48 15.76 15.75 15.74 15.72 15.71 15.70 15.69 15.68 15.66 15.65 15.64 15.63 15.29 14.95 14.61 14.28 13.91 13.61 13.32 13.02 12.72 12.54 12.48 8.70 8.77 8.84 8.90 8.97 9.04 9.11 9.17 9.24 9.31 9.38 9.44 9.31 9.17 9.03 8.88 8.82 8.61 8.40 8.14 7.92 7.88 7.87 10.46 10.54 10.62 10.70 10.79 10.87 10.95 11.03 11.11 11.19 11.27 11.35 11.19 11.03 10.86 10.68 10.60 10.35 10.09 9.78 9.52 9.48 9.46 13.75 13.74 13.73 13.72 13.71 13.70 13.69 13.68 13.67 13.66 13.65 13.64 13.35 13.07 12.78 12.50 12.00 11.84 11.69 11.44 11.19 11.04 10.99 16.39 16.38 16.36 16.35 16.34 16.33 16.31 16.30 16.29 16.28 16.26 16.25 15.91 15.57 15.23 14.90 14.30 14.11 13.93 13.63 13.33 13.16 13.10 8.88 8.95 9.02 9.09 9.16 9.23 9.30 9.37 9.44 9.50 9.57 9.64 9.51 9.38 9.24 9.10 8.90 8.76 8.62 8.37 8.15 8.12 8.11 10.68 10.76 10.85 10.93 11.01 11.10 11.18 11.26 11.34 11.43 11.51 11.59 11.44 11.28 11.11 10.94 10.70 10.53 10.37 10.06 9.80 9.76 9.74 TC 86 / 72 SHC 14.69 14.67 14.66 14.65 14.64 14.63 14.62 14.61 14.60 14.59 14.57 14.56 14.27 13.99 13.70 13.42 13.10 12.85 12.60 12.35 12.10 11.95 11.90 17.50 17.49 17.47 17.46 17.45 17.43 17.42 17.41 17.39 17.38 17.37 17.35 17.01 16.67 16.33 15.99 15.61 15.31 15.02 14.72 14.42 14.24 14.18 8.96 9.03 9.10 9.17 9.24 9.31 9.38 9.45 9.52 9.58 9.65 9.72 9.60 9.48 9.36 9.22 9.18 8.98 8.78 8.53 8.33 8.30 8.29 10.77 10.85 10.94 11.02 11.11 11.19 11.27 11.36 11.44 11.52 11.61 11.69 11.55 11.40 11.25 11.09 11.03 10.79 10.56 10.26 10.01 9.98 9.97 TC 90 / 75 SHC 15.42 15.40 15.39 15.38 15.37 15.36 15.35 15.33 15.32 15.31 15.30 15.29 15.00 14.71 14.42 14.13 13.81 13.56 13.31 13.07 12.82 12.67 12.62 18.37 18.36 18.34 18.33 18.32 18.30 18.29 18.27 18.26 18.25 18.23 18.22 17.87 17.53 17.18 16.84 16.46 16.16 15.87 15.57 15.27 15.09 15.03 9.13 9.20 9.27 9.34 9.41 9.48 9.55 9.62 9.70 9.77 9.84 9.91 9.79 9.68 9.56 9.43 9.39 9.20 9.01 8.76 8.56 8.54 8.53 10.97 11.06 11.15 11.23 11.32 11.40 11.49 11.57 11.66 11.74 11.83 11.91 11.78 11.64 11.49 11.34 11.29 11.06 10.83 10.53 10.29 10.26 10.25 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. 54 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 24: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table (continued). Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LSN180HSV5 18,000 17.65 17.63 17.62 17.60 17.59 17.58 17.56 17.55 17.54 17.52 17.51 17.50 17.08 16.66 16.24 15.82 15.37 14.99 14.62 14.24 13.87 13.65 13.57 23.53 23.51 23.49 23.47 23.46 23.44 23.42 23.40 23.38 23.37 23.35 23.33 22.77 22.21 21.65 21.09 20.49 19.99 19.49 18.99 18.49 18.19 18.10 12.33 12.43 12.52 12.62 12.71 12.81 12.90 13.00 13.10 13.19 13.29 13.38 13.16 12.93 12.70 12.46 12.33 12.00 11.67 11.27 10.93 10.85 10.83 16.82 16.95 17.08 17.21 17.35 17.48 17.61 17.74 17.87 18.00 18.13 18.26 17.95 17.65 17.33 17.00 16.82 16.37 15.92 15.38 14.91 14.81 14.77 73 / 61 TC SHC 18.74 18.73 18.71 18.70 18.68 18.67 18.66 18.64 18.63 18.61 18.60 18.58 18.16 17.74 17.32 16.90 16.44 16.06 15.69 15.32 14.94 14.72 14.64 24.99 24.97 24.95 24.93 24.91 24.89 24.87 24.85 24.84 24.82 24.80 24.78 24.21 23.65 23.09 22.53 21.92 21.42 20.92 20.42 19.92 19.62 19.52 13.02 13.13 13.23 13.33 13.43 13.53 13.63 13.73 13.83 13.93 14.03 14.13 13.92 13.70 13.47 13.23 13.12 12.78 12.45 12.05 11.71 11.64 11.62 17.77 17.91 18.05 18.19 18.32 18.46 18.60 18.74 18.87 19.01 19.15 19.28 18.99 18.69 18.38 18.06 17.89 17.44 16.99 16.44 15.98 15.88 15.85 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 19.84 19.82 19.81 19.79 19.78 19.76 19.75 19.73 19.72 19.70 19.69 19.67 19.24 18.82 18.40 17.97 17.51 17.13 16.76 16.39 16.01 15.79 15.71 26.45 26.43 26.41 26.39 26.37 26.35 26.33 26.31 26.29 26.27 26.25 26.23 25.66 25.09 24.53 23.96 23.35 22.85 22.35 21.85 21.35 21.05 20.95 12.61 12.71 12.81 12.91 13.00 13.10 13.20 13.30 13.39 13.49 13.59 13.69 13.49 13.30 13.09 12.88 12.78 12.47 12.17 11.79 11.48 11.42 11.40 17.21 17.34 17.47 17.61 17.74 17.88 18.01 18.14 18.27 18.41 18.54 18.67 18.41 18.14 17.86 17.57 17.44 17.02 16.60 16.09 15.66 15.59 15.56 20.63 20.61 20.60 20.58 20.57 20.55 20.53 20.52 20.50 20.49 20.47 20.46 20.03 19.60 19.17 18.75 18.00 17.77 17.53 17.16 16.79 16.56 16.49 27.50 27.48 27.46 27.44 27.42 27.40 27.38 27.36 27.34 27.32 27.29 27.27 26.70 26.13 25.57 25.00 24.00 23.69 23.38 22.88 22.38 22.08 21.98 12.88 12.98 13.08 13.18 13.28 13.38 13.48 13.58 13.68 13.78 13.87 13.97 13.79 13.60 13.40 13.19 12.90 12.70 12.50 12.13 11.82 11.77 11.75 17.57 17.70 17.84 17.98 18.12 18.25 18.39 18.52 18.66 18.79 18.93 19.07 18.81 18.55 18.28 18.00 17.60 17.33 17.06 16.55 16.12 16.05 16.03 TC 86 / 72 SHC 22.03 22.01 22.00 21.98 21.96 21.94 21.93 21.91 21.89 21.88 21.86 21.84 21.41 20.98 20.55 20.12 19.65 19.28 18.90 18.53 18.15 17.93 17.85 29.37 29.35 29.33 29.30 29.28 29.26 29.24 29.21 29.19 29.17 29.15 29.13 28.55 27.97 27.40 26.83 26.20 25.70 25.20 24.70 24.20 23.90 23.81 12.98 13.09 13.19 13.29 13.39 13.49 13.59 13.69 13.79 13.89 13.99 14.09 13.92 13.75 13.56 13.37 13.30 13.01 12.73 12.36 12.07 12.03 12.01 17.72 17.85 17.99 18.13 18.27 18.41 18.54 18.68 18.82 18.95 19.09 19.23 18.99 18.75 18.50 18.24 18.14 17.75 17.36 16.87 16.47 16.41 16.39 TC 90 / 75 SHC 23.12 23.11 23.09 23.07 23.05 23.04 23.02 23.00 22.98 22.97 22.95 22.93 22.50 22.06 21.63 21.20 20.72 20.35 19.97 19.60 19.22 19.00 18.92 30.83 30.81 30.79 30.76 30.74 30.72 30.69 30.67 30.64 30.62 30.60 30.57 29.99 29.42 28.84 28.27 27.63 27.13 26.63 26.13 25.63 25.33 25.23 13.23 13.33 13.44 13.54 13.64 13.75 13.85 13.95 14.05 14.16 14.26 14.36 14.20 14.03 13.85 13.67 13.61 13.33 13.05 12.70 12.41 12.37 12.36 18.05 18.19 18.33 18.47 18.61 18.75 18.89 19.03 19.17 19.31 19.45 19.59 19.37 19.14 18.90 18.65 18.57 18.19 17.81 17.32 16.93 16.88 16.86 Standard Wall-Mounted LMN249HVT 24,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 55 MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 25: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LMN079HVT 8,100 LSN090HSV5 10,900 LSN120HSV5 13,600 Outdoor Air Temp. °F DB °F WB 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 61 TC 4.17 4.70 5.22 5.93 6.19 6.63 7.01 7.40 7.74 8.08 8.22 8.35 8.57 8.57 8.57 8.57 5.61 6.32 7.03 7.98 8.33 8.93 9.44 9.96 10.42 10.87 11.06 11.24 11.53 11.53 11.53 11.53 7.00 7.89 8.78 9.95 10.40 11.14 11.78 12.42 13.00 13.56 13.80 14.02 14.39 14.39 14.39 14.39 64 TC 4.11 4.64 5.17 5.87 6.13 6.57 6.96 7.34 7.68 8.02 8.16 8.29 8.51 8.51 8.51 8.51 5.53 6.24 6.95 7.90 8.26 8.85 9.36 9.87 10.33 10.80 10.98 11.15 11.46 11.46 11.46 11.46 6.90 7.78 8.67 9.86 10.30 11.03 11.67 12.31 12.89 13.46 13.70 13.91 14.29 14.29 14.29 14.29 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 TC TC 4.07 4.60 5.13 5.83 6.09 6.53 6.92 7.30 7.64 7.98 8.12 8.25 8.47 8.47 8.47 8.47 5.48 6.18 6.90 7.85 8.21 8.79 9.31 9.82 10.28 10.74 10.93 11.10 11.40 11.40 11.40 11.40 6.83 7.71 8.60 9.79 10.23 10.96 11.60 12.24 12.82 13.39 13.63 13.84 14.22 14.22 14.22 14.22 4.05 4.58 5.11 5.81 6.08 6.52 6.90 7.28 7.62 7.96 8.10 8.23 8.45 8.45 8.45 8.45 5.45 6.16 6.88 7.82 8.18 8.77 9.29 9.79 10.25 10.71 10.90 11.08 11.37 11.37 11.37 11.37 6.80 7.69 8.58 9.76 10.20 10.95 11.59 12.21 12.79 13.36 13.60 13.82 14.19 14.19 14.19 14.19 72 TC 3.99 4.52 5.05 5.75 6.02 6.46 6.84 7.22 7.56 7.90 8.04 8.17 8.39 8.39 8.39 8.39 5.37 6.08 6.79 7.75 8.09 8.69 9.20 9.72 10.18 10.64 10.82 10.99 11.30 11.30 11.30 11.30 6.70 7.59 8.48 9.67 10.10 10.85 11.49 12.13 12.70 13.28 13.50 13.72 14.10 14.10 14.10 14.10 75 TC 3.82 4.34 4.87 5.56 5.81 6.22 6.63 7.04 7.39 7.73 7.87 7.98 8.16 8.20 8.22 8.25 5.14 5.85 6.56 7.48 7.82 8.37 8.93 9.47 9.94 10.40 10.59 10.73 10.98 11.03 11.06 11.11 6.50 7.40 8.31 9.47 9.90 10.60 11.30 11.99 12.58 13.16 13.40 13.59 13.90 13.96 14.00 14.06 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 56 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 26: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LMN159HVT 15,600 LMN249HVT 25,600 °F DB °F WB 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 61 TC 8.03 9.05 10.06 11.42 10.03 12.77 13.51 14.25 14.90 15.56 15.83 16.08 16.51 16.51 16.51 16.51 11.11 12.52 13.93 15.81 16.51 17.69 18.70 19.72 20.63 21.55 21.91 22.26 22.86 22.86 22.86 22.86 13.17 14.84 16.51 18.74 19.57 20.96 22.17 23.37 24.45 25.53 25.97 26.39 27.09 27.09 27.09 27.09 64 TC 7.91 8.93 9.95 11.31 11.81 12.66 13.40 14.13 14.79 15.45 15.71 15.97 16.39 16.39 16.39 16.39 10.96 12.37 13.77 15.65 16.36 17.53 18.55 19.56 20.48 21.39 21.76 22.11 22.70 22.70 22.70 22.70 12.99 14.66 16.33 18.56 19.39 20.77 21.98 23.19 24.27 25.35 25.79 26.21 26.90 26.90 26.90 26.90 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 TC TC 7.84 8.86 9.87 11.23 11.73 12.58 13.32 14.06 14.71 15.37 15.64 15.89 16.32 16.32 16.32 16.32 10.85 12.26 13.67 15.55 16.25 17.43 18.44 19.46 20.37 21.29 21.65 22.01 22.59 22.59 22.59 22.59 12.87 14.54 16.20 18.42 19.27 20.65 21.85 23.07 24.15 25.23 25.67 26.08 26.78 26.78 26.78 26.78 7.80 8.82 9.83 11.19 11.70 12.55 13.28 14.02 14.67 15.34 15.60 15.86 16.28 16.28 16.28 16.28 10.80 12.21 13.61 15.49 16.20 17.37 18.39 19.41 20.32 21.24 21.60 21.95 22.53 22.53 22.53 22.53 12.80 14.47 16.14 18.37 19.20 20.59 21.80 23.00 24.08 25.16 25.60 26.02 26.71 26.71 26.71 26.71 72 TC 7.69 8.71 9.72 11.08 11.59 12.43 13.17 13.91 14.56 15.22 15.49 15.74 16.17 16.17 16.17 16.17 10.64 12.06 13.46 15.34 16.04 17.22 18.24 19.25 20.17 21.08 21.44 21.80 22.38 22.38 22.38 22.38 12.61 14.29 15.96 18.18 19.01 20.40 21.61 22.82 23.90 24.98 25.41 25.83 26.53 26.53 26.53 26.53 75 TC 7.35 8.37 9.38 10.71 11.19 11.98 12.77 13.57 14.23 14.88 15.15 15.36 15.71 15.78 15.83 15.89 10.18 11.58 12.99 14.84 15.49 16.59 17.69 18.79 19.70 20.61 20.98 21.27 21.76 21.85 21.91 22.02 12.06 13.73 15.40 17.59 18.37 19.66 20.96 22.26 23.34 24.42 24.86 25.20 25.79 25.90 25.97 26.08 Standard Wall-Mounted LSN180HSV5 21,600 Outdoor Air Temp. TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 57 STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Acoustic Data Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 63: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. MULTI F MULTI F MAX • Measurement taken 2.6′ below the bottom of the unit and at a distance of 3.3′ from face of unit. • Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full load normal operating condition. • Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is installed. • Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±1. • Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745. Table 27: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]). 3.3 ft. Model No. 2.6 ft. Microphone Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating) High Fan Speed Medium Fan Speed Low Fan Speed LMN079HVT 35 31 26 LSN090HSV5 36 32 27 LSN120HSV5 38 34 29 LMN159HVT 42 38 32 LSN180HSV5 44 38 34 LMN249HVT 46 41 36 Figure 64:LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, and LSN120HSV5 Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. LMN079HVT 58 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED LSN090HSV5 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. LSN120HSV5 MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Acoustic Data Figure 65:LMN159HVT, LSN180HSV5, and LMN249HVT Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. LMN159HVT LSN180HSV5 LMN249HVT Standard Wall-Mounted Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 59 STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 66:LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, LMN159HVT Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Figure 67:LSN180HSV5 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. 60 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Figure 68:LMN249HVT Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Standard Wall-Mounted Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 61 STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Refrigerant Flow Diagram MULTI F MULTI F MAX Figure 69:Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram. Gas pipe connection port (flare connection) Cooling Heating M Liquid pipe connection port (flare connection) Table 28: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Sizes. Model No. Vapor (inch) Table 29: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connections. Liquid (inch) LMN079HVT LSN090HSV5 LSN120HSV5 LMN249HVT Ø1/4 Ø1/2 Description (Based on Cooling Mode) Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor Evaporator Middle Temperature Thermistor Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor Water Level Sensor (Optional) | STD. WALL-MOUNTED Vapor (inch) Liquid (inch) Ø3/8 Ø1/4 LSN180HSV5 Ø5/8 Ø3/8 LMN249HVT Ø1/2 Ø1/4 LSN090HSV5 Ø3/8 Table 30: Multi F LSNxxxHSV5 Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. 62 Model No. LMN079HVT LMN159HVT LSN180HSV5 Thermistor for Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor for Evaporator Outlet Temperature Cross Flow Fan Thermistor for Evaporator Inlet Temperature Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Heat Exchanger PCB Connector CN-TH1 CN-TH2 LSN120HSV5 LMN159HVT Table 31: Multi F LMNxxxHVT Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. Description (Based on Cooling Mode) Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor PCB Connector CN-TH1 Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor CN-TH2 Water Level Sensor (Optional) CN-TH3 CN-TH3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Figure 70:Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, LSN180HSV5 Indoor Units Wiring Diagram. Standard Wall-Mounted Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 63 STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 71: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted LMN079HVT, LMN159HVT, LMN249HVT Indoor Unit Wiring Diagram. 64 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Factory Supplied Parts and Materials Factory Supplied Parts Table 32: Parts Table. Part Quantity Installation Plate One (1) Image 7,000 ~ 15,000 Btu/h Indoor Units 18,000 and 24,000 Btu/h Indoor Units Five (5) Type “B” Screws (M4 x 12L) Two (2) Wireless Controller with Holder AKB74955602 One (1) Factory Supplied Materials • Owner’s Manual • Installation Manual Required Tools • • • • Level Screwdriver Electric drill Hole core drill Standard Wall-Mounted Type “A” Screws • Flaring tool set • Spanner (Half union) • Thermometer WARNING Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death. Note: Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 65 STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Selecting the Best Location MULTI F MULTI F MAX Figure 72:Minimum Clearance Requirements. • • • • • • >4 inches Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked. Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily. Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration. Ensure there is sufficient space from the ceiling and floor. Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space. Locate the indoor unit where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit. Recommended height • • • • ≥5 inches >4 inches >6-1/2 feet from floor Don’ts Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used. Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored. Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators. Do not install the unit near a doorway. The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and / or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed. Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure: Figure 73:Installation Plate— • Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees). Side View. • Add insulation between the floor joists. • Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor. Installation Plate Mounting the Installation Plate The mounting wall should be strong and solid enough to protect the unit from vibration. • Mount the installation plate on the wall using the Type “A” screws. If mounting the unit on concrete, consider using anchor bolts. • Always mount the installation plate horizontally. Measure the wall and mark the centerline using thread and a level. Figure 74:Installation Plate for LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, and LMN159HVT Units. 17-3/8 6-7/8 Ø2-9/16 5 Place a level on raised tab 18-1/8 inches Ø2-9/16 5-3/16 Type "A" Screws Unit Outline 3-11/16 8-1/2 Right rear piping 17-3/8 Frame Hooks Figure 75:Installation Plate for LSN180HSV5 and LMN249HVT Units. Place a level on raised tab Unit Outline Left rear piping Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Do’s Ø2-3/4 inches 22-7/16 inches Installation Plate Left rear piping Measuring Tape Ø2-3/4 inches Right rear piping 2-7/32 inches 2-23/32 inches 4-1/8 inches Measuring Tape Hanger 8-5/32 inches If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components. 66 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Preparing for Installation Prepare the refrigerant piping and drain hose (indoor unit piping) for installation through the wall: press on the top of the tubing clamp and slowly guide the piping / hose down (depending on installation requirements, then to the left or right). Relock the tubing clamp after the piping / hose are released. Figure 76:Preparing for Installation. Note: Do not bend the piping / drain hose from side to side; it may damage the components. Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame Figure 77:Locking the Indoor Unit onto the Installation Plate. Figure 78:Accessing the Back of the Indoor Unit. Installation plate Tubing Clamp Figure 79:Removing the Frame Cover. Figure 80:Exterior Back View of Indoor Unit. Tubing Clamp Right Frame Cover Figure 81:Piping Installed to the Left. Connecting pipe Standard Wall-Mounted 1. Attach the three (3) hooks on the top of the indoor unit to the top edge of the installation plate. Verify the hooks are properly attached to the installation plate by gently shaking the indoor unit from side to side. 2. Unlock the tubing clamp from the indoor unit frame. For easier access between the bottom of the indoor unit and the wall, prop the clamp between the indoor unit frame and installation plate. 3. Remove the screw covers at the bottom of the indoor unit, unscrew the two (2) screws, remove the frame cover, remove the piping connection cover, and position the piping for installation (down, back, left, or right). Down Back Left Figure 82:Piping Installed to the Right. Tape Tape Connecting pipe Drain hose Drain hose Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 67 STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices MULTI F MULTI F MAX • • • • • • • Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals. Confirm power source specifications. Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient. Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate. Confirm cable thickness specifications. It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist. Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor. • Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death. Figure 83: Connecting Power Wiring / Communications Cable. Note: • Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation. A voltage drop may cause the following problems: • Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device. • Compressor will not receive the proper starting current. Terminal block Wired Remote Controller Terminal (Optional) Power wiring / communications cable Cable restraint Connect Power Wiring and Communications Cable 1. Insert the power wiring / communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the bottom of the indoor unit. 2. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit. 3. Secure power wiring/communications cable with cable restraint. 68 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED 3 or S GND Indoor Unit Terminal Block 1(L1 ) 2(L2) 3 RD 3 GND Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) BL 2(L2) RD BR 1(L1) Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) GRN / YLW Indoor Unit Terminal Block BL GND Figure 85:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Connections— LSN180HSV5 and LMN249HVT. BR Figure 84:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Connections—LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5 and LMN159HVT. GRN / YLW Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 3 or S GND MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Controller Options Standard wall-mounted indoor units include a wireless controller (AKB74955602), but optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. Wireless Controller Figure 86:AKB74955602 Wireless Controller. Table 33: AKB74955602 Wireless Controller Functions. Screen Display Standard Wall-Mounted * * * RESET Buttons Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 69 MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Wired Controller Connections Indoor Unit Terminal Block To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX Systems Only) To Wired Controller 1(L1 ) 2(L2) To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX Systems Only) Wired Controller Placement Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature. • • • • • Do not install the wired controller near or in: Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners Hot or cold air from ducts Radiant heat from the sun or appliances Concealed pipes and chimneys An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall 70 | STD. WALL-MOUNTED CN-REMO 3 BL BR GRN / YLW CN-REMO 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block GND RD BL 1(L1 ) 2(L2) BR GRN / YLW Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual GND Figure 88:Wired Controller Connection on Indoor Unit Terminal Block— LSN180HSV5 and LMN249HVT Models. RD Figure 87:Wired Controller Connection on Indoor Unit Terminal Block— LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, and LMN159HVT Models. To Wired Controller Figure 89:Proper Location for the Wired Controller. TEMP YES Remote Controlle r NO TEMP Rem ot e Cont roller NO Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. TEMP Remote Controlle r 4 to 5 feet above the floor NO MULTI F MULTI F MAX STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Hanging the Wired Controller 1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring / cable on applicable side. Figure 91:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves. Top Top Back Right Side Right Side 2. Choose and mark the area of installation. Use the provided parts and screw the wall plate into place. Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself. 3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides. Figure 92:Attaching the Wall Plate. Figure 93:Installing / Removing the Controller. Installing the Controller Wall Removing the Controller Wall Wall Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described. Finalizing Indoor Unit Installation Figure 90:Attach Bottom of Indoor Unit to Installation Plate. 1. Move the tubing clamp to its original position. 2. Ensure the three (3) hooks are properly attached to the installation plate by gently shaking the indoor unit from side to side. 3. Press the bottom left and right sides of the indoor unit against the installation plate until the hooks click firmly into their slots. 4. Using two (2) Type “C” screws, secure the bottom of the indoor unit to the installation plate. Type 'C' screws Figure 94:Removing the Filter Tabs. 5. Remove the two (2) tabs from the filter. 6. Replace the frame cover. Filter Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. STD. WALL-MOUNTED | 71 Standard Wall-Mounted Wall 4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller. Do not damage the controller components when removing. CEILING-CONCEALED DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNIT DATA “Mechanical Specifications” on page 73 “General Data / Specifications” on page 74 “Dimensions” on page 75 “Cooling Capacity Table” on page 76 “Heating Capacity Table” on page 78 “External Static Pressure” on page 79 “Acoustic Data” on page 80 “Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 81 “Wiring Diagram” on page 83 “Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 84 “Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 85 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Mechanical Specifications and Features Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Unit Figure 95: Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Unit. General All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) units have a sound rating no higher than 36 dB(A) as tested per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745, and are designed for low-static pressure up to 0.20″WG. Coil Refrigerant System System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare, and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be field insulated. Electrical Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power with voltage variances of ±10%. Casing The case has a low profile design with a maximum height of 7.5 inches designed to mount fully concealed above a finished ceiling in as little as 8 inches vertical space. Casing is manufactured of galvanized steel plate, and provided with hanger brackets designed to support the weight on four corners. Unit has a front horizontal supply air discharge outlet, and one rear horizontal return air inlet; unit is also field-convertible for a rear bottom return. Fan Assembly and Control The units have at least two direct-drive, Sirocco fans made of high strength ABS HT-700 polymeric resin that are statically and dynamically balanced. The fans are mounted on a common brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) motor with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on vibration-attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digital control algorithm. The indoor fan has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and Features • • • • Inverter (Variable speed fan) External mounted drain pump Control lock function Auto operation • • • • Air Filter Return air is filtered with a factory-supplied, removable, washable filter accessible from the rear of the indoor unit. Microprocessor Control The unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in nonvolatile memory residing on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate mode. The microprocessor will also provide self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power / communications cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit. Controls The indoor unit is supplied with an LG wired controller. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable. Condensate Lift/Pump The indoor unit is provided with an externally mounted, factory installed and wired condensate lift/pump capable of providing a minimum 27.5 inch lift from the bottom surface of the unit. Drain pump has a safety switch to shut off the indoor unit if the condensate rises too high in the drain pan. Auto restart operation Dehumidification function Two thermistor control External static pressure control • Self-diagnostics function • Group control • Wired thermostat included Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 73 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has two rows of coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil. has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. Each of the settings can be field-adjusted from the factory setting (RPM / ESP). The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the controller set-point and space temperature. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS General Data / Specifications Table 34: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Low-Static Ducted Indoor Unit General Data. Model Name Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h) 1 LDN097HV4 LDN127HV4 LMDN186HV 9,000 12,000 18,000 10,400 13,800 20,800 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Operating Range Cooling (°F WB) Heating (°F DB) 57-77 59-81 Fan Type Sirocco Motor Output (W) x Qty. Motor/Drive Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) Factory Set External Static Pressure (in. wg) Max. External Static Pressure (in. wg) 19 x 1 5 x 1, 19 x 1 Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct 318 / 247 / 194 353 / 300 / 247 530 / 441 / 353 0.10 0.20 Unit Data Refrigerant Type2 R410A Refrigerant Control Power Supply V, Ø, Hz EEV 208-230, 1, 60 3 Rated Amps (A) 0.40 Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L) 0.80 30 / 26 / 23 4 Dimensions (W x H x D, in.) 31 / 28 / 27 27-9/16 x 7-15/32 x 27-9/16 35-7/16 x 7-15/32 x 27-9/16 39 51 Net Unit Weight (lbs.) Shipping Weight (lbs.) 46 Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG) 60 57 4 x 18 5 Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number 36 / 34 / 31 (2 x 11 x 14) x 1 (2 x 11 x 18) x 1 Piping Liquid (in.) 1/4 Vapor (in.) 3/8 Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.) 1-1/4, 1 Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 2 This unit comes with a dry helium charge. 1 74 | DUCT (LOW STATIC) 1/2 Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V. 4 Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during operation. 5 All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Dimensions Figure 96:LDN097HV4, LDN127HV4, and LMDN186HV Dimensions. Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 75 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 35: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LDN097HV4 9,000 LDN127HV4 12,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC 8.82 8.82 8.81 8.80 8.80 8.79 8.78 8.78 8.77 8.76 8.76 8.75 8.54 8.33 8.12 7.91 7.68 7.50 7.31 7.12 6.94 6.82 6.79 11.76 11.75 11.75 11.74 11.73 11.72 11.71 11.70 11.69 11.68 11.67 11.66 11.38 11.10 10.83 10.55 10.25 10.00 9.75 9.50 9.25 9.10 9.05 7.55 7.61 7.67 7.73 7.79 7.84 7.90 7.96 8.02 8.08 8.14 8.19 8.06 7.92 7.78 7.63 7.55 7.35 7.15 6.90 6.69 6.65 6.63 9.94 10.02 10.09 10.17 10.25 10.33 10.40 10.48 10.56 10.63 10.71 10.79 10.61 10.43 10.24 10.04 9.94 9.67 9.41 9.09 8.81 8.75 8.73 73 / 61 TC SHC 9.37 9.36 9.36 9.35 9.34 9.33 9.33 9.32 9.31 9.31 9.30 9.29 9.08 8.87 8.66 8.45 8.22 8.03 7.84 7.66 7.47 7.36 7.32 12.49 12.48 12.48 12.47 12.46 12.45 12.44 12.43 12.42 12.41 12.40 12.39 12.11 11.82 11.54 11.26 10.96 10.71 10.46 10.21 9.96 9.81 9.76 7.98 8.04 8.10 8.16 8.22 8.29 8.35 8.41 8.47 8.53 8.59 8.66 8.52 8.39 8.25 8.10 8.03 7.83 7.63 7.38 7.17 7.13 7.11 10.50 10.58 10.66 10.75 10.83 10.91 10.99 11.07 11.15 11.23 11.31 11.40 11.22 11.05 10.86 10.67 10.57 10.31 10.04 9.72 9.44 9.39 9.37 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 9.92 9.91 9.90 9.90 9.89 9.88 9.87 9.87 9.86 9.85 9.84 9.84 9.62 9.41 9.20 8.99 8.75 8.57 8.38 8.19 8.01 7.89 7.86 13.22 13.21 13.20 13.19 13.18 13.17 13.16 13.15 13.14 13.13 13.12 13.11 12.83 12.55 12.26 11.98 11.67 11.42 11.17 10.92 10.67 10.52 10.48 7.72 7.78 7.84 7.90 7.96 8.02 8.08 8.14 8.20 8.26 8.32 8.38 8.26 8.14 8.02 7.89 7.83 7.64 7.45 7.22 7.03 7.00 6.98 10.17 10.25 10.33 10.40 10.48 10.56 10.64 10.72 10.80 10.88 10.96 11.03 10.88 10.72 10.55 10.38 10.30 10.06 9.81 9.51 9.26 9.21 9.19 10.31 10.31 10.30 10.29 10.28 10.27 10.27 10.26 10.25 10.24 10.24 10.23 10.01 9.80 9.59 9.37 9.00 8.88 8.77 8.58 8.39 8.28 8.24 13.75 13.74 13.73 13.72 13.71 13.70 13.69 13.68 13.67 13.66 13.65 13.64 13.35 13.07 12.78 12.50 12.00 11.84 11.69 11.44 11.19 11.04 10.99 7.89 7.95 8.01 8.07 8.13 8.19 8.25 8.31 8.38 8.44 8.50 8.56 8.44 8.33 8.20 8.08 7.90 7.78 7.66 7.43 7.24 7.21 7.19 10.38 10.46 10.54 10.62 10.70 10.79 10.87 10.95 11.03 11.11 11.19 11.27 11.12 10.96 10.80 10.63 10.40 10.24 10.08 9.78 9.53 9.49 9.47 86 / 72 TC SHC 11.01 11.01 11.00 10.99 10.98 10.97 10.96 10.96 10.95 10.94 10.93 10.92 10.71 10.49 10.28 10.06 9.83 9.64 9.45 9.26 9.08 8.96 8.93 14.69 14.67 14.66 14.65 14.64 14.63 14.62 14.61 14.60 14.59 14.57 14.56 14.27 13.99 13.70 13.42 13.10 12.85 12.60 12.35 12.10 11.95 11.90 7.95 8.01 8.08 8.14 8.20 8.26 8.32 8.38 8.45 8.51 8.57 8.63 8.53 8.42 8.30 8.19 8.14 7.97 7.79 7.57 7.39 7.37 7.36 10.47 10.55 10.63 10.71 10.79 10.88 10.96 11.04 11.12 11.20 11.28 11.36 11.22 11.08 10.93 10.78 10.72 10.49 10.26 9.97 9.73 9.70 9.69 90 / 75 TC SHC 11.56 11.55 11.54 11.54 11.53 11.52 11.51 11.50 11.49 11.48 11.47 11.47 11.25 11.03 10.82 10.60 10.36 10.17 9.99 9.80 9.61 9.50 9.46 15.42 15.40 15.39 15.38 15.37 15.36 15.35 15.33 15.32 15.31 15.30 15.29 15.00 14.71 14.42 14.13 13.81 13.56 13.31 13.07 12.82 12.67 12.62 8.10 8.17 8.23 8.29 8.36 8.42 8.48 8.54 8.61 8.67 8.73 8.79 8.69 8.59 8.48 8.37 8.34 8.16 7.99 7.77 7.60 7.58 7.57 10.67 10.75 10.83 10.92 11.00 11.08 11.16 11.25 11.33 11.41 11.49 11.58 11.45 11.31 11.17 11.02 10.97 10.75 10.52 10.24 10.00 9.98 9.97 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. 76 | DUCT (LOW STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 36: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table (continued). Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) 17.65 17.63 17.62 17.60 17.59 17.58 17.56 17.55 17.54 17.52 17.51 17.50 17.08 16.66 16.24 15.82 15.37 14.99 14.62 14.24 13.87 13.65 13.57 13.09 13.20 13.30 13.40 13.50 13.60 13.71 13.81 13.91 14.01 14.11 14.21 13.98 13.74 13.49 13.23 13.09 12.74 12.39 11.97 11.61 11.53 11.50 73 / 61 TC SHC 18.74 18.73 18.71 18.70 18.68 18.67 18.66 18.64 18.63 18.61 18.60 18.58 18.16 17.74 17.32 16.90 16.44 16.06 15.69 15.32 14.94 14.72 14.64 13.83 13.94 14.05 14.16 14.26 14.37 14.48 14.58 14.69 14.80 14.90 15.01 14.78 14.55 14.30 14.06 13.93 13.58 13.23 12.80 12.44 12.36 12.34 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 19.84 19.82 19.81 19.79 19.78 19.76 19.75 19.73 19.72 19.70 19.69 19.67 19.24 18.82 18.40 17.97 17.51 17.13 16.76 16.39 16.01 15.79 15.71 13.39 13.50 13.60 13.71 13.81 13.91 14.02 14.12 14.23 14.33 14.43 14.53 14.33 14.12 13.90 13.68 13.57 13.25 12.93 12.53 12.19 12.13 12.11 20.63 20.61 20.60 20.58 20.57 20.55 20.53 20.52 20.50 20.49 20.47 20.46 20.03 19.60 19.17 18.75 18.00 17.77 17.53 17.16 16.79 16.56 16.49 13.67 13.78 13.89 13.99 14.10 14.21 14.31 14.42 14.52 14.63 14.74 14.84 14.64 14.44 14.23 14.01 13.70 13.49 13.28 12.88 12.55 12.50 12.48 TC 86 / 72 SHC 22.03 22.01 22.00 21.98 21.96 21.94 21.93 21.91 21.89 21.88 21.86 21.84 21.41 20.98 20.55 20.12 19.65 19.28 18.90 18.53 18.15 17.93 17.85 13.79 13.90 14.01 14.11 14.22 14.33 14.43 14.54 14.65 14.75 14.86 14.97 14.78 14.60 14.40 14.20 14.12 13.82 13.52 13.13 12.82 12.77 12.76 TC 90 / 75 SHC 23.12 23.11 23.09 23.07 23.05 23.04 23.02 23.00 22.98 22.97 22.95 22.93 22.50 22.06 21.63 21.20 20.72 20.35 19.97 19.60 19.22 19.00 18.92 14.05 14.16 14.27 14.38 14.49 14.60 14.71 14.82 14.92 15.03 15.14 15.25 15.08 14.90 14.71 14.52 14.46 14.16 13.86 13.48 13.18 13.14 13.13 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LMDN186HV 18,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 77 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 37: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) Outdoor Air Temp. °F DB °F WB 61 TC 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 0 5 10 17 20 25 30 35 40 45 47 50 55 60 63 68 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 -0.4 4.5 9 15 19 23 28 32 36 41 43 46 51 56 59 64 5.35 6.03 6.71 7.61 7.95 8.52 9.01 9.50 9.94 10.37 10.55 10.72 11.00 11.00 11.00 11.00 7.10 8.00 8.90 10.10 10.55 11.30 11.95 12.60 13.18 13.77 14.00 14.23 14.60 14.60 14.60 14.60 10.70 12.06 13.41 15.22 15.90 17.03 18.01 18.99 19.87 20.75 21.10 21.44 22.01 22.01 22.01 22.01 LDN097HV4 9,000 LDN127HV4 12,000 LMDN186HV 18,000 64 TC 5.28 5.95 6.63 7.54 7.88 8.44 8.93 9.42 9.86 10.30 10.48 10.64 10.93 10.93 10.93 10.93 7.00 7.90 8.80 10.00 10.45 11.20 11.85 12.50 13.08 13.67 13.90 14.13 14.50 14.50 14.50 14.50 10.55 11.91 13.26 15.07 15.75 16.88 17.86 18.84 19.72 20.60 20.95 21.29 21.86 21.86 21.86 21.86 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 TC TC 5.23 5.90 6.58 7.49 7.83 8.39 8.88 9.37 9.81 10.25 10.43 10.59 10.88 10.88 10.88 10.88 6.93 7.83 8.73 9.93 10.38 11.13 11.78 12.43 13.02 13.60 13.83 14.06 14.43 14.43 14.43 14.43 10.45 11.81 13.16 14.97 15.65 16.78 17.76 18.74 19.62 20.50 20.85 21.19 21.75 21.75 21.75 21.75 5.20 5.88 6.56 7.46 7.80 8.37 8.86 9.34 9.78 10.22 10.40 10.57 10.85 10.85 10.85 10.85 6.90 7.80 8.70 9.90 10.35 11.10 11.75 12.40 12.98 13.57 13.80 14.03 14.40 14.40 14.40 14.40 10.40 11.76 13.11 14.92 15.60 16.73 17.71 18.69 19.57 20.45 20.80 21.14 21.70 21.70 21.70 21.70 72 TC 75 TC 5.12 5.80 6.48 7.39 7.72 8.29 8.78 9.27 9.71 10.15 10.32 10.49 10.78 10.78 10.78 10.78 6.80 7.70 8.60 9.80 10.25 11.00 11.65 12.30 12.88 13.47 13.70 13.93 14.30 14.30 14.30 14.30 10.25 11.61 12.96 14.77 15.45 16.58 17.56 18.54 19.42 20.30 20.65 20.99 21.55 21.55 21.55 21.55 4.90 5.58 6.26 7.14 7.46 7.99 8.52 9.04 9.48 9.92 10.10 10.24 10.48 10.52 10.55 10.60 6.50 7.40 8.30 9.48 9.90 10.60 11.30 12.00 12.58 13.17 13.40 13.59 13.90 13.96 14.00 14.06 9.80 11.15 12.51 14.29 14.92 15.98 17.03 18.09 18.97 19.85 20.20 20.48 20.95 21.04 21.10 21.20 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 78 | DUCT (LOW STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS External Static Pressure Table 38: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) External Static Pressure Setting Values Table. Static Pressure (in. wg) Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LDN097HV4 9,000 LMDN186HV 18,000 0.04 0.08 Airflow Rate / CFM 0.12 0.16 0.20 Setting Value High 318 98 103 108 116 123 130 Mid 247 82 88 94 102 110 118 Low 194 69 76 83 91 99 109 High 353 95 99 104 109 116 124 Mid 300 86 91 96 101 108 116 Low 247 78 82 87 93 100 108 High 530 123 125 129 134 141 145 Mid 441 109 112 117 123 129 136 Low 353 95 99 104 109 116 124 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN127HV4 12,000 0.0 • To get the desired air flow and external static pressure combination, use the setting value from the table. Using a setting value other than that listed in the table will not provide the desired combination. • Table data is based at 230V. Air flow rate varies according to voltage fluctuation. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 79 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Acoustic Data • Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full load normal operating condition. • Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is installed. • Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3. • Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745. 4.9 ft. Ceiling 6.6 ft. Table 39:Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]). Model No. Microphone LDN097HV4 LMDN096HV High Fan Speed 30 LMDN186HV 36 34 31 LDN127HV4 LMDN126HV LMDN186HV 70 NC-45 NC-45 40 40 NC-40 NC-40 NC-35 NC-35 30 30 NC-30 NC-30 20 20 10 10 NC-25 NC-25 Approximate Approximate Hearing Hearing Threshold Threshold 63 63 NC-60 NC-60 125 125 250 250 500 500 1000 1000 2000 2000 4000 4000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) | DUCT (LOW STATIC) 8000 8000 NC-55 NC-55 50 50 NC-50 NC-50 NC-45 NC-45 40 40 NC-40 NC-40 NC-35 NC-35 30 30 NC-30 NC-30 20 20 NC-20 NC-20 NC-15 NC-15 NC-65 NC-65 60 60 10 10 NC-25 NC-25 Approximate Approximate Hearing Hearing Threshold Threshold 63 63 125 125 Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) NC-50 NC-50 Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) 70 70 50 50 23 27 70 70 NC-55 NC-55 26 28 80 NC-60 NC-60 Low Fan Speed 31 80 80 NC-65 NC-65 Medium Fan Speed LDN127HV4 80 80 60 60 80 Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating) LDN097HV4 Figure 98: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 97: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. NC-60 250 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) NC-55 50 NC-50 NC-45 40 NC-40 NC-35 30 NC-30 NC-25 20 Approximat e Hearing Threshold NC-20 NC-20 NC-15 NC-15 NC-65 60 10 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 63 NC-20 NC-15 125 250 500 1000 2000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 4000 8000 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Refrigerant Flow Diagrams Figure 99: LDN097HV4 Refrigerant Flow Diagram. : Cooling : Heating Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor Sirocco Fan M Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor Indoor Unit Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor Table 40: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN097HV4 Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters. Model No. Vapor (inch) Liquid (inch) LDN097HV4 Ø3/8 Ø1/4 Table 41: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN097HV4 Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. Description (Based on Cooling Mode) PCB Connector Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor CN-ROOM Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/IN Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/OUT Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 81 DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Refrigerant Flow Diagrams MULTI F MULTI F MAX Figure 100:LDN127HV4 and LMDN186HV Refrigerant Flow Diagram. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual : Cooling : Heating Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor Sirocco Fan M M Indoor Unit Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor Table 42: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN127HV4 and LMDN186HV Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters. Model No. Vapor (inch) LDN127HV4 Ø3/8 LMDN186HV Ø1/2 Liquid (inch) Ø1/4 Table 43: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN127HV4 and LMDN186HV Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. Description (Based on Cooling Mode) 82 PCB Connector Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor CN-ROOM Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/IN Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/OUT | DUCT (LOW STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Figure 101:Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN097HV4, LDN127HV4, and LMDN186HV Indoor Units Wiring Diagram. Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 83 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Factory Supplied Parts and Materials Factory Supplied Parts Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Table 44: Parts Table. Part Quantity Drain Hose Metal Clamp Insulation for Fittings 1 Image Part Quantity One (1) Zip Ties Four (4) Two (2) Washers for Hanging Brackets Eight (8) One (1) Set Simple Controller with Mode Selection (AKB72955816)1 One (1) For Vapor Piping For Liquid Piping Image Simple Mode Controllers for the ceiling-concealed duct (low static) indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW. Factory Supplied Materials • Owner’s Manual • Installation Manual Required Tools • • • • • Level Screwdriver Electric drill Hole core drill Flaring tool set • • • • Torque wrenches Hexagonal wrench Gas-leak detector Thermometer WARNING Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death. Note: Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation. 84 | DUCT (LOW STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Selecting the Best Location Do’s • • • • • • Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked. Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily. Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration. Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor unit. Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space. Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit. Figure 102:General Installation Guidelines. Top view 23-5/8 Don’ts • The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and / or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed. Control box Access Opening ( 23-5/8 x 23-5/8 ) 23-5/8 (Unit : Inch) Side view Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used. • Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored. • Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators. • Do not install the unit near a doorway. (Unit : Inch) H = ≤25/32 • "H" dimension is necessary to ensure a slope is included for condensate drainage. Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air In some installation applications, areas(floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure: • Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees). • Add insulation between the floor joists. • Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor. Figure 103:Service / Access Panel Dimensions. A (Min) B (Min) Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum: • Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches thick). • Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick). • Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the conditioned space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation. Ceiling Service Space A If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components. B Table 45:General Access Panel Dimensions. Dimensions (in.) Model / Capacity (Btu/h) A B LDN097HV4 / 9,000 LDN127HV4 / 12,000 LMDN186HV / 18,000 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 31-1/2 31-1/2 39-3/8 DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 85 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units can be installed in two ways: Table 47:Indoor Unit Bolt Locations. E Figure 104:Air inlet from the back of the indoor Figure 105:Air inlet from the bottom of the indoor unit. unit. Air Filter G Back Panel Air Filter I Air Outlet Back Panel J A B F Air Outlet Indoor Unit s Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual D C H Drainage hole Table 46:Indoor Unit Bolt Location Dimensions. Model / Capacity (Btu/h) LDN097HV4 / 9,000 LDN127HV4 / 12,000 LMDN186HV / 18,000 A B 28-27/32 30-13/32 36-23/32 38-9/32 C D 24-23/32 27-9/16 Dimensions (in.) E F 1-13/32 7-15/32 G 25/32 H 25-31/32 33-27/32 I J 27-9/16 6-3/32 35-7/16 Preparing the Installation Area and Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame 1. Select and mark the area for the suspension or console bolts (use embedded inserts or anchor bolts in new buildings, and hole-in-anchors in older buildings). 2. Drill the holes. 3. Add the set-anchor and the plate washer to the bolts (bolts should be at least 13/32 inches in diameter), and then insert the bolts into the installation area. Figure 106:Preparing the Installation Area. 4. Add the plate washer, spring washer, and nut to secure the bolts into the installation area. 5. Position the indoor unit installation plates onto the bolts. Secure using nuts, plate washers, and spring washers. Adjust for level as necessary. Figure 107:Console Bolt Options. Figure 108:Hanging the Indoor Unit. M10 Nut (Field X 4 supplied) X4 M10 washer X4 M10 SP. washer M10 Nut Install a canvas duct to the air outlet and air inlet so that vibration from the indoor unit does not carry to the duct or ceiling. Also, add insulation to the interior of the duct, and apply anti-vibration to the suspension bolts. • Unit must be installed correctly. • Tighten the nuts and bolts to prevent the unit from falling. 86 | DUCT (LOW STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. X4 M10 washer M10 SP. washer (Field X 4 supplied) X4 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Installing the Drain System Figure 109:Drain Connection. • Drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down. • Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit when connecting the field-supplied drain piping. • Drain piping specifications: - Indoor Unit Drain Connection: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter. - Field-Supplied Drain Piping: Polyvinyl chloride piping with 1-inch inside diameter and pipe fittings. Insulation (Field Supplied) Drain Pipe (Field Supplied) Indoor Unit Close Any Gaps Drain Hole Ducted (low static) indoor units have two options for condensate drainage: Using the factory-installed drain pump, or using a gravity drain. • Maximum drain lift is 27-9/16 inches, therefore, the drain piping should be placed below the maximum lift height. • Field-installed drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down. Figure 110:Indoor Unit Using Drain Pump. 1/50~1/100 Drain Pipe ≤27-9/16 inch Drain Pump Pump location may be different on the indoor unit. Using the Gravity Drain Field-drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down. Figure 111:Indoor Unit Using Gravity Drain. Drain hose Angle ≥ 1/50~1/100 Approx 3/32~5/32 inches Checking the Drain Pump Figure 112:Checking the Drain Pump. The unit uses a drain pump to remove condensate. The pump must be tested before the system operates. • Connect the flexible drain hose to the field-installed drain piping; leave it as is until the test is complete. • Pour water into the flexible drain hose and check for leaks. • After power wiring installation is complete, operate the drain pump to see if it sounds and functions properly. • After the test is complete, connect the flexible drain hose to the indoor unit drain port. Checking the Drainage System Flexible drain hose (accessory) Pour Water Field-Installed Drain Piping Drain Port Indoor Unit Drain Pan Figure 113:Checking the Drainage System. Glue the Joint Drain Hose Connection Use the clip (accessory) Drain Pump Pump location may be different on the indoor unit. 1. Remove the air filter. 2. Check the drainage. • Spray water on the evaporator. • Verify that water flows through the indoor unit drain hose without leaking. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 87 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Using the Drain Pump MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping Figure 114:Insulating the Piping. Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Refrigerant Piping Insulation Liquid Piping Connection Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit piping connections). Any exposed piping may generate condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F. Duct (low static) indoor units have been tested under and meet the requirements of the “KS Conditions.” If the indoor unit is installed and is operated at an extended period in a highly humid environment (dew point temperature >73°F), however, condensate will form. To prevent this phenomenon, install adiabatic glass wool insulation with a thickness or 13/32 to 13/16 inches thick. Also, install glass wool insulation on all indoor unit that are located in the ceiling plenum. Insulation for Refrigerant Piping (Field-Supplied) Clamp for Insulation (Field-Supplied) Insulation (Field-Supplied) Vapor Piping Connection Insulation for Refrigerant Piping (Field-Supplied) Insulation for Field-Installed Piping (Field-Supplied) Drain Piping Insulation Drain piping must have insulation a minimum of 7/32 inches thick. Overlap the Insulation at the Connection Ensure no gaps are present. 88 | DUCT (LOW STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines • • • • • • • Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals. Confirm power source specifications. Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient. Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate. Confirm cable thickness specifications. It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist. Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor. • Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death. • Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation. A voltage drop may cause the following problems: • Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device. • Compressor will not receive the proper starting current. Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable 1(L) 2(N) GND 3 or S GND 3 RD GRN / YLW BL 2. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit. Figure 115:Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX systems only) Power Wiring / Communications Cable Connections. Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) BR 1. Insert the power wiring / communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the side of the indoor unit. Pass the wiring through the designated access holes to prevent damage. To prevent electromagnetic interference and product malfunction, leave a space between the power wiring and communications cable outside of the indoor unit. 3. Secure the power wiring / communications cable with the cable restraint. 4. Screw the steel clamp to the inside of the control panel. • Place the wiring / cables in the clamp and tighten the plastic clamp to an open surface of the control panel. • When clamping, do not apply force to the wiring connections. • Neatly arrange the wiring, do not catch the wiring in the electric box cover, and ensure the cover firmly closes. 5. Fill in any gaps around the wiring access hole with sealant to prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit. Using a Conduit 1. Remove the rubber stopper on the indoor unit. Pass the power wiring / communications cable through the conduit, the conduit mounting plate, and to the control panel of the indoor unit. 2. Connect the power wiring / communications cable to the indoor unit terminal block. 3. Screw the conduit mounting plate to the indoor unit. Figure 116:Exterior View of Conduit Installation. Lock nut Conduit Conduit mounting plate 4. Tighten the conduit and the conduit mounting plate together. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 89 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Note: MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Controller Options Wired Controller Figure 117:AKB729558161 Wired Controller. • Operation Display Panel: Displays operation conditions. Operation Display Panel • Temperature Control Button: Sets desired temperature. Temperature Control Button Fan Speed Button • Fan Speed Button: Sets desired fan speed. On/Off Button FA N SPEED TEMP Mode Selection Check Button OPER MODE • On / Off Button: Turns system operation on and off. • Mode Selection Check Button: Selects the operation mode: Cooling, Heating, Auto, Dry (Dehumidification), or Fan. Each function will display on the LED for about three (3) seconds when the power is first cycled on. 1 Simple Mode Controllers for the ceiling-concealed duct (low static) indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW. Wired Controller Connections Controllers can connect to the indoor unit in one of two different ways. 1. LG Wired Remote Extension Cable with Molex plug (PZCWRC1; sold separately) that connects to the CN-REMO terminal on the indoor unit PCB. Figure 118:PZCWRC1 LG Wired Remote Extension Cable. Verify the connectors are properly inserted. C/BOX Cable (Plug type) FAN SPEED TEMP OPER MODE Extension cable 2. Field-supplied controller cable that connects to the indoor unit terminal block (must be at least UL2547 or UL1007, 22 AWG, two-core, one-shield core, at least FT-6 rated if local electric and building codes require plenum cable usage). To Indoor Unit CN-REMO Terminal Figure 119:Wired Controller Connections on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block. Outd Branch D (Mu CN-REMO Indoor Unit Terminal Block Comm. RD BK 12V Power Ground 1(L) 2(N) GND GRN / YLW 90 | DUCT (LOW STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 3 RD YL BL When using field-supplied controller cable, make sure to connect the yellow to yellow (communications wire), red to red (12V power wire), and black to black (ground wire) terminals from the remote controller to the indoor unit terminal blocks. BR Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Ceiling-concealed duct (low static) indoor units include an LG-supplied wired controller (AKB72955816)1, but other optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. The wireless handheld controller (Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB) is also an optional accessory with use of the wired controller. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Figure 120:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves. Hanging the Wired Controller 1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring / cable on applicable side. Top Top Back Right Side Right Side 2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself. Figure 121:Attaching the Wall Plate. Figure 122: Installing / Removing the Controller. Installing the Controller Wall 4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller. Do not damage the controller components when removing. Wall Removing the Controller Wall Wall Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described. Figure 123:Proper Location for the Wired Controller. Wired Controller Placement Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature. • • • • • Do not install the wired controller near or in: Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners Hot or cold air from ducts Radiant heat from the sun or appliances Concealed pipes and chimneys An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall TEMP YES Remote Controlle r NO TEMP Rem ot e Cont roller TEMP Remote Controlle r 4 to 5 feet above the floor NO NO Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 91 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) 3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices External Static Pressure Control Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual To provide a required air flow rate that accounts for the external static pressure change, follow the steps below. Figure 125:Controller External Static Pressure Setting Display. 1. To access system installer setting mode, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. Choose setting code value “06” by pressing the mode selection button. Figure 124:Select Code and 2. Use the temperature increase and decrease buttons to select the Set Value. desired setting value. Setting Values 01 : V-H 02 : F-H 03 : V-L 04 : F-L Code Set Value TEM P OPER MODE FAN SPEED 3. Press the on / off button to save the established settings. TEM P OPER MODE 4. To deactivate system installer setting mode after the settings have been established, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection check buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. If a button is not pressed for more than 25 seconds, the system installer setting mode will automatically deactivate. Table 48:Static Pressure Setting Table. Pressure Selection Function Zone State External Static Pressure Standard Value Variable High 01 V-H 02 F-H Fixed High 03 V-L Variable Low 04 F-L Fixed Low • Select the position after verifying duct work and the external static pressure of the indoor unit. • Factory set to pressure selection F-H. 92 FAN SPEED | DUCT (LOW STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Assigning Air Flow To assign an air flow for each fan speed, follow the steps below. 1. To access system installer setting mode, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. Choose setting code value “03” by pressing the mode selection button. Figure 126:Controller External Static Pressure Setting Display. 2. Use the fan speed button to select the desired fan speed. ( Lo→Med→Hi will display on the LED). 3. Use the temperature increase and decrease buttons to select the desired external static pressure setting value (thereby assigning the respective airflow). External static pressure value range: 0~255; the value will display near the lower right corner of the LED. 4. Press the on / off button to save the established settings. Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) 5. To deactivate system installer setting mode after the settings have been established, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection check buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. If a button is not pressed for more than 25 seconds, the system installer setting mode will automatically deactivate. FAN SPEED TEMP OPER MODE • A certified technician must set the external static pressure value(s). If the external static pressure is set incorrectly, the system may malfunction. • Do not alter the external static pressure value that corresponds to each air flow level. • External static pressure value can vary depending on the indoor unit. • If by pressing the fan speed button during external static pressure setup, the fan speed is raised to the next level, the air flow value of the previous fan speed will be maintained (external static pressure setting value is saved). Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (LOW STATIC) | 93 CEILING-CONCEALED DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNIT DATA “Mechanical Specifications” on page 95 “General Data / Specifications” on page 96 “Dimensions” on page 97 “Cooling Capacity Table” on page 98 “Heating Capacity Table” on page 99 “External Static Pressure” on page 100 “Acoustic Data” on page 100 “Refrigerant Flow Diagrams” on page 101 “Wiring Diagram” on page 102 “Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 103 “Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 104 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Mechanical Specifications and Features Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit Figure 127: Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit. General All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) units are designed for high-speed air volume against an external static pressure up to 0.78″WG for the 24,000 Btu/h model; up to 0.55″WG for the 36,000 Btu/h model. Coil Air Filter Refrigerant System System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare, and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be field insulated. Electrical Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power with voltage variances of ±10%. Casing The casing is designed to mount fully concealed above a finished ceiling. Casing is manufactured of galvanized steel plate. Cold surfaces of the unit are covered internally with a coated polystyrene insulating material, and covered externally with sheet insulation made of ethylene propylene diene monomer (M-Class) (EPDM). External insulation is plenum rated and conforms to ASTM Standard D-1418. Hanger brackets are included on the casing to support the weight on four corners. Unit has a front horizontal supply air discharge outlet, and one dedicated rear horizontal return air inlet. Fan Assembly and Control The units have two direct-drive, Sirocco fans made of high strength ABS GP-2200 polymeric resin that are statically and dynamically balanced. The fans are mounted on a common brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) motor with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on vibration-attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digital control algorithm. The indoor fan has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Features • • • • Inverter (Variable speed fan) Internal drain pump Control lock function Auto operation Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. Each of the settings can be field-adjusted from the factory setting (RPM / ESP). The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the controller setpoint and space temperature. • • • • Return air is filtered with a factory-supplied, removable, washable filter accessible from the rear of the indoor unit. High efficiency air filter options include a return filter box and an LG / Dynamic supplied air cleaner (both sold separately). Microprocessor Control The unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in nonvolatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate mode. The microprocessor will also provide self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power / communications cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit. Controls The indoor unit is supplied with an LG wired controller. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable. Condensate Lift/Pump The indoor unit is provided with a factory installed and wired internal condensate lift/pump capable of providing a minimum 27.5 inch lift from the bottom surface of the unit. Drain pump has a safety switch to shut off the indoor unit if the condensate rises too high in the drain pan. Auto restart operation Dehumidifying function Two thermistor control External static pressure control • Group control • Self-diagnostics function • Wired thermostat included Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 95 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has two rows of coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS General Data / Specifications MULTI F MULTI F MAX Table 49: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed High-Static Ducted Indoor Unit General Data. Model Name LMHN240HV LMHN360HV 24,000 36,000 27,000 40,000 57-77 57-77 59-81 59-81 Type Sirocco Sirocco Motor Output (W) x Qty. Motor/Drive Factory Set Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) Factory Set External Static Pressure (in. wg) Maximum External Static Pressure (in. wg) 154 x 1 350 x 1 Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct 688 / 618 / 530 1,130 / 953 / 706 0.39 0.39 0.78 0.55 R410A R410A Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Operating Range Cooling (°F WB) Heating (°F DB) Fan Unit Data Refrigerant Type2 Refrigerant Control EEV EEV 208-230, 1, 60 208-230, 1, 60 0.9 1.4 37 / 36 / 35 44 / 42 / 40 46-17/32 x 11-23/32 x 17-23/32 46-17/32 x 11-23/32 x 17-23/32 80 91 Power Supply V, Ø, Hz3 Rated Amps (A) Sound Pressure Level (Standard Mode) ±3 dB(A) H/M/L) Dimensions (W x H x D, in.) 4 Net Unit Weight (lbs.) Shipping Weight (lbs.) 91 101 4 x 18 4 x 18 (2 x 12 x 21) x 1 (3 x 12 x 21) x 1 Liquid (in.) 1/4 3/8 Vapor (in.) 1/2 5/8 1-1/4, 1 1-1/4, 1 Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)5 Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number Piping Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.) Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 2 This unit comes with a dry helium charge. 1 96 | DUCT (HIGH STATIC) Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V. 4 Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during operation. 5 All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Dimensions Figure 128: LMHN240HV and LMHN360HV Dimensions. Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 97 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 50:Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LMHN240HV 24,000 LMHN360HV 36,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC 23.53 23.51 23.49 23.47 23.46 23.44 23.42 23.40 23.38 23.37 23.35 23.33 22.77 22.21 21.65 21.09 20.49 19.99 19.49 18.99 18.49 18.19 18.10 35.29 35.26 35.24 35.21 35.18 35.16 35.13 35.10 35.08 35.05 35.02 34.99 34.15 33.31 32.48 31.64 30.74 29.99 29.24 28.49 27.74 27.29 27.14 17.66 17.80 17.94 18.08 18.21 18.35 18.49 18.62 18.76 18.90 19.03 19.17 18.85 18.53 18.19 17.85 17.66 17.19 16.71 16.14 15.66 15.55 15.51 25.46 25.66 25.86 26.06 26.25 26.45 26.65 26.85 27.04 27.24 27.44 27.63 27.18 26.71 26.23 25.73 25.46 24.78 24.10 23.27 22.58 22.41 22.36 73 / 61 TC SHC 24.99 24.97 24.95 24.93 24.91 24.89 24.87 24.85 24.84 24.82 24.80 24.78 24.21 23.65 23.09 22.53 21.92 21.42 20.92 20.42 19.92 19.62 19.52 37.48 37.45 37.43 37.40 37.37 37.34 37.31 37.28 37.25 37.23 37.20 37.17 36.32 35.47 34.63 33.79 32.88 32.13 31.38 30.63 29.88 29.43 29.28 18.66 18.80 18.95 19.09 19.24 19.38 19.53 19.67 19.82 19.96 20.10 20.25 19.94 19.63 19.30 18.96 18.79 18.31 17.84 17.26 16.78 16.68 16.64 26.90 27.11 27.32 27.53 27.73 27.94 28.15 28.36 28.57 28.78 28.98 29.19 28.75 28.29 27.82 27.33 27.09 26.40 25.72 24.89 24.19 24.04 23.99 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 26.45 26.43 26.41 26.39 26.37 26.35 26.33 26.31 26.29 26.27 26.25 26.23 25.66 25.09 24.53 23.96 23.35 22.85 22.35 21.85 21.35 21.05 20.95 39.67 39.64 39.61 39.58 39.55 39.52 39.49 39.46 39.43 39.40 39.37 39.34 38.49 37.64 36.79 35.94 35.02 34.27 33.52 32.77 32.02 31.57 31.43 18.07 18.21 18.35 18.49 18.63 18.77 18.91 19.05 19.19 19.33 19.47 19.61 19.33 19.05 18.75 18.45 18.31 17.87 17.43 16.90 16.45 16.36 16.34 26.04 26.25 26.45 26.65 26.85 27.06 27.26 27.46 27.66 27.86 28.06 28.26 27.87 27.46 27.03 26.59 26.39 25.76 25.13 24.36 23.71 23.59 23.55 27.50 27.48 27.46 27.44 27.42 27.40 27.38 27.36 27.34 27.32 27.29 27.27 26.70 26.13 25.57 25.00 24.00 23.69 23.38 22.88 22.38 22.08 21.98 41.26 41.23 41.19 41.16 41.13 41.10 41.07 41.04 41.01 40.97 40.94 40.91 40.05 39.20 38.35 37.50 36.00 35.53 35.07 34.32 33.57 33.12 32.97 18.45 18.59 18.73 18.88 19.02 19.16 19.31 19.45 19.59 19.73 19.88 20.02 19.75 19.48 19.19 18.90 18.48 18.19 17.91 17.37 16.93 16.86 16.83 26.59 26.80 27.01 27.21 27.42 27.63 27.83 28.04 28.24 28.45 28.65 28.86 28.47 28.08 27.66 27.24 26.64 26.23 25.82 25.04 24.41 24.30 24.26 TC 86 / 72 SHC 29.37 29.35 29.33 29.30 29.28 29.26 29.24 29.21 29.19 29.17 29.15 29.13 28.55 27.97 27.40 26.83 26.20 25.70 25.20 24.70 24.20 23.90 23.81 44.06 44.02 43.99 43.96 43.92 43.89 43.86 43.82 43.79 43.76 43.72 43.69 42.82 41.96 41.10 40.25 39.30 38.55 37.80 37.05 36.31 35.86 35.71 18.60 18.75 18.89 19.04 19.18 19.33 19.47 19.61 19.76 19.90 20.04 20.19 19.94 19.69 19.43 19.15 19.05 18.64 18.23 17.71 17.29 17.23 17.21 26.81 27.02 27.23 27.44 27.65 27.86 28.07 28.27 28.48 28.69 28.90 29.10 28.75 28.39 28.00 27.61 27.46 26.87 26.28 25.54 24.93 24.84 24.81 TC 90 / 75 SHC 30.83 30.81 30.79 30.76 30.74 30.72 30.69 30.67 30.64 30.62 30.60 30.57 29.99 29.42 28.84 28.27 27.63 27.13 26.63 26.13 25.63 25.33 25.23 46.25 46.21 46.18 46.14 46.11 46.07 46.04 46.00 45.97 45.93 45.90 45.86 44.99 44.12 43.26 42.40 41.44 40.69 39.94 39.20 38.45 38.00 37.85 18.95 19.10 19.25 19.40 19.54 19.69 19.84 19.99 20.13 20.28 20.42 20.57 20.34 20.10 19.84 19.59 19.50 19.10 18.70 18.19 17.77 17.72 17.71 27.32 27.54 27.75 27.96 28.17 28.39 28.60 28.81 29.02 29.23 29.44 29.65 29.32 28.97 28.61 28.23 28.11 27.53 26.96 26.22 25.62 25.55 25.53 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. 98 | DUCT (HIGH STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 51:Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LMHN360HV 36,000 61 64 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 72 75 °F DB °F WB TC TC TC TC TC TC 0 -0.4 13.89 13.70 13.57 13.50 13.30 12.72 5 4.5 15.65 15.46 15.33 15.26 15.07 14.48 10 9 17.41 17.22 17.09 17.02 16.83 16.24 17 15 19.76 19.57 19.43 19.37 19.17 18.55 20 19 20.64 20.45 20.32 20.25 20.05 19.37 25 23 22.11 21.91 21.78 21.72 21.52 20.74 30 28 23.38 23.18 23.05 22.99 22.79 22.11 35 32 24.65 24.46 24.33 24.26 24.07 23.48 40 36 25.79 25.60 25.47 25.40 25.21 24.62 45 41 26.93 26.74 26.61 26.54 26.35 25.76 47 43 27.39 27.20 27.07 27.00 26.80 26.22 50 46 27.83 27.64 27.51 27.44 27.24 26.58 55 51 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.20 60 56 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.32 63 59 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.39 68 64 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.51 0 -0.4 20.58 20.29 20.10 20.00 19.71 18.84 5 4.5 23.19 22.90 22.71 22.61 22.32 21.45 10 9 25.80 25.51 25.31 25.22 24.93 24.06 17 15 29.28 28.99 28.79 28.70 28.41 27.48 20 19 30.58 30.29 30.10 30.00 29.71 28.70 25 23 32.75 32.46 32.27 32.17 31.88 30.72 30 28 34.64 34.35 34.15 34.06 33.77 32.75 35 32 36.52 36.23 36.04 35.94 35.65 34.78 40 36 38.21 37.92 37.73 37.63 37.34 36.47 45 41 39.90 39.61 39.42 39.32 39.03 38.16 47 43 40.58 40.29 40.10 40.00 39.71 38.84 50 46 41.23 40.94 40.75 40.65 40.36 39.38 55 51 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.29 60 56 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.47 63 59 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.58 68 64 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.76 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) LMHN240HV 24,000 Outdoor Air Temp. TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 99 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS External Static Pressure / Acoustic Data Table 52:Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) External Static Pressure Setting Values Table. Static Pressure (in. wg) 0.1 0.16 0.23 0.31 Model No. / Nominal Capacity Airflow Rate / CFM of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) High Mid Low High Mid Low LMHN360HV 36,000 688 618 530 1,130 953 706 0.47 0.55 0.62 0.70 0.78 140 137 134 160 152 141 147 144 141 - 154 151 148 - 160 157 154 - Setting Value (in. wg) 82 78 73 - 92 89 86 124 112 97 103 99 96 133 122 107 113 110 107 140 130 117 122 119 116 148 137 125 131 128 125 154 145 133 • To get the desired air flow and external static pressure combination, use the setting value from the table. Using a setting value other than that listed in the table will not provide the desired combination. • Table data is based at 230V. Air flow rate varies according to voltage fluctuation. Figure 129: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. DISCHARGE • Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full load normal operating condition. • Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is installed. • Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3. • Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745. SUCTION DUCT 6.6 ft. 3.3 ft. 4.9 ft. DUCT Table 53:Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]). Model No. Figure 130: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. LMHN240HV 80 70 70 NC-65 60 NC-60 NC-55 50 NC-50 NC-45 40 NC-40 NC-35 30 NC-30 NC-25 20 Approximate Hearing Threshold 10 100 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) | DUCT (HIGH STATIC) 4000 8000 High Fan Speed Medium Fan Speed Low Fan Speed LMHN240HV 37 36 35 LMHN360HV 44 42 40 NC-65 60 NC-60 NC-55 50 NC-50 NC-45 40 NC-40 NC-35 30 NC-30 NC-25 20 Approximate Hearing Threshold NC-20 NC-15 Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating) LMHN360HV 80 Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa) Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual LMHN240HV 24,000 0.39 10 63 NC-20 NC-15 125 250 500 1000 2000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 4000 8000 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Refrigerant Flow Diagrams Figure 131: LMHN240HV and LMHN360HV Refrigerant Flow Diagram. Gas pipe connection port (flare connection) Heat exchanger Heating Cooling Thermistor for evaporator outlet temperature Sirocco Fan M Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Thermistor for suction air temperature Thermistor for evaporator inlet temperature Liquid pipe connection port (flare connection) Table 54: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters. Model No. Vapor (inch) Liquid (inch) LMHN240HV Ø1/2 Ø1/4 LMHN360HV Ø5/8 Ø3/8 Table 55: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. Description (Based on Cooling Mode) PCB Connector Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor CN-ROOM Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/IN Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/OUT Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 101 DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagrams Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 132: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) LMHN240HV Indoor Units Wiring Diagram. Figure 133: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) LMHN360HV Indoor Units Wiring Diagram. ROOM PIPE IN THERMISTOR THERMISTOR 102 | DUCT (HIGH STATIC) PIPE OUT THERMISTOR Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Factory Supplied Parts and Materials / Installation Factory Supplied Parts Table 56: Parts Table. Part Quantity Drain Hose Metal Clamp 1 Part Quantity One (1) Zip Ties Four (4) Two (2) Insulation for Fittings One (1) Set Simple Controller with Mode Selection (AKB72955816)1 One (1) Eight (8) Image For Vapor Piping For Liquid Piping Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Washers for Hanging Brackets Image Simple Mode Controllers for the ceiling-concealed duct (high static) indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW. Factory Supplied Materials • Owner’s Manual • Installation Manual Required Tools • • • • Level Screwdriver Electric drill Hole core drill WARNING • • • • • Flaring tool set Torque wrenches Hexagonal wrench Gas-leak detector Thermometer Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death. Note: Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation. Selecting the Best Location Do’s • • • • • • Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked. Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily. Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration. Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor unit. Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space. Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit. Don’ts • • • • Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used. Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored. Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators. Do not install the unit near a doorway. The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and / or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 103 MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components. In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure: • Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees). • Add insulation between the floor joists. • Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor. Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum: • Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches thick). • Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick). • Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the conditioned space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation. Figure 134: Access Panel and General Service Space Required Dimensions. Figure 135: Indoor Unit Bolt Locations. A B C E 23-5/8 inches x 23-5/8 inches 23-5/8 inches D G I F 23-5/8 inches 39-3/8 inches Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air H H = ≥25/32 inches Drain hole Table 57:Indoor Unit Bolt Location Dimensions. Model / Capacity (Btu/h) LMHN240HV / 24,000 LMHN360HV / 36,000 104 | DUCT (HIGH STATIC) Dimensions (inches) A B C D E F G H I 48-17/32 46-17/32 13-31/32 1-25/32 17-23/32 1-7/32 3-5/8 32-19/32 7-11/32 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Preparing the Installation Area and Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame 1. Select and mark the area for the suspension or console bolts (use embedded inserts or anchor bolts in new buildings, and hole-inanchors in older buildings). 2. Drill the holes. 3. Add the set-anchor and the plate washer to the bolts (bolts should be at least 13/32 inches in diameter), and then insert the bolts into the installation area. Figure 136: Preparing the Installation Area. 4. Add the plate washer, spring washer, and nut to secure the bolts into the installation area. 5. Position the indoor unit installation plates onto the bolts. Secure using nuts, plate washers, and spring washers. Adjust for level as necessary. Figure 137: Suspension Bolt Options. Figure 138: Hanging the Indoor Unit. X4 M10 washer (FieldX 4 supplied) X4 M10 washer X4 M10 SP. washer X4 M10 Nut X4 M10 SP. washer (Fieldsupplied) Install a canvas duct to the air outlet and air inlet so that vibration from the indoor unit does not carry to the duct or ceiling. Also, add insulation to the interior of the duct, and apply anti-vibration to the suspension bolts. • Unit must be installed correctly. Tighten the nuts and bolts to prevent the unit from falling and causing severe injury or death. Installing the Drain System Figure 139:Indoor Unit Drain Piping. • Drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down. • Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit when connecting the field-supplied drain piping. • Drain piping specifications: - Indoor Unit Drain Connection: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter. - Field-Supplied Drain Piping: Polyvinyl chloride piping with 1-inch inside diameter and pipe fittings. Indoor unit Drain Port Maintenance Figure 140:Drain Piping Installation Dimensions. Maximum 27-9/16 inches Hanger distance Maximum 11-13/16 inches Hanger Bracket 3.3~49.2 feet 1/50~1/100 slope Metal clamp Flexible drain hose Drain Pipe Support 1/50~1/100mm Maximum 27-9/16 inches Insulation Do not apply force or twist the drain hose: it may leak. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 105 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) M10 Nut MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Checking the Drain Pump Figure 141:Checking the drain pump. The unit uses a drain pump to remove condensate. The pump must be tested before the system operates. • Connect (field supplied) flexible drain hose to the field-installed drain piping; leave it as is until the test is complete. • Pour water into the flexible drain hose and check for leaks. • After power wiring installation is complete, operate the drain pump to see if it sounds and functions properly. • After the test is complete, connect the flexible drain hose to the indoor unit drain port. Flexible drain hose (accessory) Pour Water Field-Installed Drain Piping Drain Port Drain Pump Glue the Joint Drain Hose Connection Use the clip (accessory) Drain Pan Checking the Drainage System Figure 142:Checking the Drainage System. 1. Remove the air filter. 2. Check the drainage. • Spray water on the evaporator. • Verify that water flows through the indoor unit drain hose without leaking. Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched. Refrigerant Piping Insulation Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit piping connections). Any exposed piping may generate condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F. Figure 143: Insulating the Piping. Liquid Piping Connection Insulation for Refrigerant Piping (Field-Supplied) Drain Piping Insulation Drain piping must have insulation a minimum of 7/32 inches thick. Clamp for Insulation (Field-Supplied) Insulation (Field-Supplied) Vapor Piping Connection Insulation for Refrigerant Piping (Field-Supplied) Insulation for Field-Installed Piping (Field-Supplied) Overlap the Insulation at the Connection Ensure no gaps are present. 106 | DUCT (HIGH STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines • • • • • • • Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals. Confirm power source specifications. Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient. Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate. Confirm cable thickness specifications. It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist. Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor. Note: • Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation. A voltage drop may cause the following problems: • Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device. • Compressor will not receive the proper starting current. Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable Figure 144:Accessing the Indoor Unit Terminal Block. 1. To access the terminal block, first unscrew the cover from the control box. Terminal Block Control Box 2. Insert the power wiring / communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the sides of the indoor unit and control box. Pass the wiring through the designated access holes to prevent damage. To prevent electromagnetic interference and product malfunction, leave a space between the power wiring and communications cable outside of the indoor unit. A 3. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch Control Box Cover distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit. Lock nut Figure 145:Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F Conduit MAX systems only) Power Wiring / Communications Cable Conduit 4. Secure the power wiring / communications cable with the cable mounting Connections. restraint. plate 3 GND RD Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) 3 or S3 1(L1) 2(L2) GND BL 1(L1 ) 2 (L2) GRN / YLW 6. Fill in any gaps around the wiring access holes with sealant to prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit. Indoor Unit Terminal Block BR 5. Screw the steel clamp to the inside of the control panel. • Place the wiring / cables in the clamp and tighten the plastic clamp to an open surface of the control panel. • When clamping, do not apply force to the wiring connections. • Neatly arrange the wiring, do not catch the wiring in the electric box cover, and ensure the cover firmly closes. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Power Wiring Connections DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 107 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) • Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death. MULTI F A MAX MULTI F Terminal Block Control Box DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Using a Conduit 1. Remove the rubber stopper on the indoor unit. Pass the power wiring / communications cable through the conduit, the conduit mounting plate, and to / through the control panel of the indoor unit. 2. Connect the power wiring / communications cable to the indoor unit terminal block. 3. Screw the conduit mounting plate to the indoor unit. 4. Tighten the conduit and the conduit mounting plate together. Control Box Cover Figure 146:Exterior View of Conduit Installation. Lock nut Conduit Conduit mounting plate If the distance between the outdoor unit and indoor unit is greater than 131 feet, connect the power wiring and communications cable separately (i.e., a conduit cannot be used). Controller Options Ceiling-concealed duct (high static) indoor units include an LG-supplied wired controller (AKB72955816)1, but other optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. The wireless handheld controller (Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB) is also an optional accessory with use of the wired controller. • • • • • 3 Power Wiring Connections Wired Controller Figure 147:AKB729558161 Wired Controller. Operation Display Panel: Displays operation conditions. Temperature Control Button: Sets desired temperature. Fan Speed Button: Sets desired fan speed. On / Off Button: Turns system operation on and off. Mode Selection Check Button: Selects the operation mode: Cooling, Heating, Auto, Dry (Dehumidification), or Fan. Operation Display Panel Temperature Control Button Fan Speed Button On/Off Button FA N SPEED TEMP Mode Selection Check Button OPER MODE Each function will display on the LED for about three (3) seconds when the power is first cycled on. 1 Simple Mode Controllers for the ceiling-concealed duct (high static) indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW. Wired Controller Connections Controllers can connect to the indoor unit in one of two different ways. 1. LG Wired Remote Extension Cable with Molex plug (PZCWRC1; sold separately) that connects to the CN-REMO terminal on the indoor unit PCB. Figure 148:PZCWRC1 LG Wired Remote Extension Cable. Verify the connectors are properly inserted. C/BOX Cable (Plug type) OPER MODE 2. Field-supplied controller cable that connects to the indoor unit terminal block (must be at least UL2547 or UL1007, 22 AWG, two-core, one-shield core, at least FT-6 rated if local electric and building codes require plenum cable usage). To Indoor Unit CN-REMO Terminal FAN SPEED TEMP Extension cable Figure 149:Wired Controller Connections on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block. CN-REMO RD BK 1(L1 ) 2 (L2) 3 RD 108 | DUCT (HIGH STATIC) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. GND GRN / YLW YL 12V Comm. Power Ground BL When using field-supplied controller cable, make sure to connect the yellow to yellow (communications wire), red to red (12V power wire), and black to black (ground wire) terminals from the remote controller to the indoor unit terminal blocks. Indoor Unit Terminal Block BR Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual 1(L1) 2(L2) Outdoor Unit Terminal Branch Distribution Unit Te (Multi F MAX System 3o MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Wired Controller Placement Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature. NO Do not install the wired controller near or in: Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners Hot or cold air from ducts Radiant heat from the sun or appliances Concealed pipes and chimneys An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall Hanging the Wired Controller 1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring / cable on applicable side. TEMP YES Remote Controlle r 4 to 5 feet above the floor TEMP Rem ot e Cont TEMP Remote Controlle r roller NO NO Figure 151:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves. Top Top Back Right Side Right Side 2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself. 3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides. Figure 152:Attaching the Wall Plate. 4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller. Do not damage the controller components when removing. Figure 153:Installing / Removing the Controller. Installing the Controller Wall Wall Removing the Controller Wall Wall Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 109 Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) • • • • • Figure 150:Proper Location for the Wired Controller. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices External Static Pressure Control To provide a required air flow rate that accounts for the external static pressure change, follow the steps below. Figure 155:Controller External Static Pressure Setting Display. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual 1. To access system installer setting mode, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. Choose setting code value “06” by pressing the mode selection button. 2. Use the temperature increase and decrease buttons to select the desired setting value. Figure 154:Select Code and Set Value. Setting Values Code 01 : V-H 02 : F-H 03 : V-L 04 : F-L 3. Press the on / off button to save the established settings. TEM P OPER MODE FAN SPEED TEM P OPER MODE 4. To deactivate system installer setting mode after the settings have been established, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection check buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. If a button is not pressed for more than 25 seconds, the system installer setting mode will automatically deactivate. Table 64:Static Pressure Setting Table. Pressure Selection Function Zone State External Static Pressure Standard Value Variable High 01 V-H 02 F-H Fixed High 03 V-L Variable Low 04 F-L Fixed Low • Select the position after verifying duct work and the external static pressure of the indoor unit. • Factory set to pressure selection F-H. 110 | DUCT (HIGH STATIC) FAN SPEED Set Value Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Assigning Air Flow To assign an air flow for each fan speed, follow the steps below. 1. To access system installer setting mode, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. Choose setting code value “03” by pressing the mode selection button. Figure 156:Controller External Static Pressure Setting Display. 2. Use the fan speed button to select the desired fan speed. ( Lo→Med→Hi will display on the LED). 3. Use the temperature increase and decrease buttons to select the desired external static pressure setting value (thereby assigning the respective airflow). External static pressure value range: 0~255; the value will display near the lower right corner of the LED. Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) FAN SPEED 4. Press the on / off button to save the established settings. TEMP 5. To deactivate system installer setting mode after the settings have been established, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection check buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. If a button is not pressed for more than 25 seconds, the system installer setting mode will automatically deactivate. OPER MODE • A certified technician must set the external static pressure value(s). If the external static pressure is set incorrectly, the system may malfunction. • Do not alter the external static pressure value that corresponds to each air flow level. • External static pressure value can vary depending on the indoor unit. • If by pressing the fan speed button during external static pressure setup, the fan speed is raised to the next level, the air flow value of the previous fan speed will be maintained (external static pressure setting value is saved). Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DUCT (HIGH STATIC) | 111 FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNIT DATA “Mechanical Specifications” on page 113 “General Data / Specifications” on page 114 “Dimensions” on page 115 “Cooling Capacity Table” on page 117 “Heating Capacity Table” on page 120 “Acoustic Data” on page 121 “Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution” on page 123 “Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 125 “Wiring Diagram” on page 126 “Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 127 “Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 128 MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Mechanical Specifications and Features Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units General All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Four-way ceilingcassette units have a sound rating no higher than 38 dB(A) as tested per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745. Coil Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has two rows of coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil. Refrigerant System Electrical Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power with voltage variances of ±10%. Casing The case is constructed of a galvanized steel plate designed to recess in the ceiling, and has a surface mounted concentric grille on the bottom of the unit. Unit has four supply air outlets and one return air inlet. Ventilation Air The case has a factory designated knockouts to connect a fieldsupplied, pressurized, and filtered outside air duct. Fan Assembly and Control All indoor units have a single, direct-drive turbo fan. Fans are manufactured of high-strength ABS HT-700 polymeric resin that is statically and dynamically balanced. The fan motor is brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on vibration-attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessorbased direct digital control algorithm that provides pre-programmed, field-selectable fixed or auto fan speeds in the Heating and Cooling modes. The indoor fan has Low, Med, High, Power Cool and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. Auto setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the controller setpoint and space temperature. Air Filter Return air is filtered with a factory-supplied, removable, washable Features • • • • • Inverter (Variable speed fan) Internal drain pump Jet cool Control lock function Auto operation • • • • Figure 157: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit. Architectural Grille An architectural grille is sold as a separate required accessory. The four-way grille is off-white acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) polymeric resin with a tapered trim edge. Airflow Guide Vanes The supply air outlet has four-directional slot diffusers, each equipped with an independent oscillating motorized guide vane to change airflow direction. A guide vane algorithm sequentially changes the predominant discharge airflow direction in counterclockwise pattern, or can be used to lock each guide vane independently in a fieldadjusted fixed position. The four vanes can be individually adjusted from the wired remote controller to customize the airflow pattern for the conditioned space. A setting in the cooling and heating modes can cycle the vanes up and down for uniform / random air distribution. Microprocessor Control The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in non-volatile memory residing on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate mode. The microprocessor will also provide self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power / communications cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit. Controls The indoor unit casing has a factory-standard, integral infrared sensor designed to communicate with the supplied LG wireless handheld remote controller. An optional wired controller is available as an additional accessory. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable. Condensate Lift/Pump The indoor unit is provided with a factory installed and wired internal condensate lift/pump capable of providing a minimum 27.5 inch lift from the bottom surface of the unit. Drain pump has a safety switch to shut off the indoor unit if the condensate rises too high in the drain pan. Auto restart operation 24-Hour on/off timer Two thermistor control Required accessory grille (PT-QCHW0 or PT-UQC) sold separately • Group Control • Plasma kit (PTPKQ0) sold separately • Wireless LCD remote control included; wired thermostat available (sold separately) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 113 Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare, and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be field insulated. filter accessible from the bottom of the unit. A plasma filter is also available as an optional accessory. FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX General Data / Specifications Table 65:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit General Data. Model Name LMCN077HV LCN097HV4 LCN127HV4 LMCN185HV Grille (Sold Separately) PT-QCHW0 / PT-UQC PT-QCHW0 / PT-UQC PT-QCHW0 / PT-UQC PT-QCHW0 / PT-UQC Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)1 7,000 9,000 12,000 18,000 Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h) 8,100 10,400 13,800 20,800 1 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Operating Range Cooling (°F WB) Heating (°F DB) 57-77 59-81 Fan Type Turbo Motor Output (W) x Qty. Motor/Drive Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) 43 x 1 Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct 265 / 212 / 177 300 / 265 / 230 335 / 283 / 247 459 / 424 / 388 Unit Data Refrigerant Type2 R410A Refrigerant Control EEV Power Supply V, Ø, Hz3 208-230, 1, 60 Rated Amps (A) 0.25 Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L) 31 / 27 / 24 4 36 / 33 / 30 Body Dimensions (W x H x D, in.) 38 / 35 / 32 22-7/16 x 8-7/16 x 22-7/16 Grille (Sold separately) Dimensions (WxHxD, in.) 22-7/16 x 10-3/32 x 22-7/16 27-9/16 x 7/8 x 27-9/16 Body Net Weight (lbs.) 31 34 Grille (Sold separately) Net Weight (lbs.) 7 Body Shipping Weight (lbs.) 34 Grille (Sold separately) Shipping Weight (lbs.) Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG) 38 / 37 / 34 37 11 42 9 9 11 4 x 18 5 Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number (2 x 8 x 18) x 1 (2 x 10 x 18) x 1 Piping Liquid (in.) 1/4 Vapor (in.) 3/8 Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.) 1-1/4, 1 Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 2 This unit comes with a dry helium charge. 1 114 | CEILING-CASSET TE 1/2 Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V. 4 Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during operation. 5 All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Dimensions Figure 158:LMCN077HV, LCN097HV4, and LCN127HV4 Dimensions. Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 115 FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Dimensions Supply Air Vane Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 159: LMCN185HV Dimensions. Supply Air Vane | CEILING-CASSET TE Supply Air Vane Return Air Grille 116 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Cooling Capacity Table Table 66:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LMCN077HV 7,000 73 / 61 TC SHC Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 6.86 6.86 6.85 6.85 6.84 6.84 6.83 6.83 6.82 6.81 6.81 6.80 6.64 6.48 6.31 6.15 5.98 5.83 5.69 5.54 5.39 5.31 5.28 8.82 8.82 8.81 8.80 8.80 8.79 8.78 8.78 8.77 8.76 8.76 8.75 8.54 8.33 8.12 7.91 7.68 7.50 7.31 7.12 6.94 6.82 6.79 7.29 7.28 7.28 7.27 7.27 7.26 7.25 7.25 7.24 7.24 7.23 7.23 7.06 6.90 6.73 6.57 6.39 6.25 6.10 5.96 5.81 5.72 5.69 9.37 9.36 9.36 9.35 9.34 9.33 9.33 9.32 9.31 9.31 9.30 9.29 9.08 8.87 8.66 8.45 8.22 8.03 7.84 7.66 7.47 7.36 7.32 7.71 7.71 7.70 7.70 7.69 7.68 7.68 7.67 7.67 7.66 7.66 7.65 7.48 7.32 7.15 6.99 6.81 6.66 6.52 6.37 6.23 6.14 6.11 9.92 9.91 9.90 9.90 9.89 9.88 9.87 9.87 9.86 9.85 9.84 9.84 9.62 9.41 9.20 8.99 8.75 8.57 8.38 8.19 8.01 7.89 7.86 4.87 4.91 4.95 4.99 5.03 5.06 5.10 5.14 5.18 5.21 5.25 5.29 5.20 5.11 5.02 4.93 4.87 4.74 4.61 4.46 4.32 4.29 4.28 6.31 6.36 6.41 6.46 6.50 6.55 6.60 6.65 6.70 6.75 6.80 6.85 6.73 6.62 6.50 6.37 6.31 6.14 5.97 5.77 5.59 5.55 5.54 5.15 5.19 5.23 5.27 5.31 5.35 5.39 5.43 5.47 5.51 5.55 5.59 5.50 5.42 5.33 5.23 5.19 5.05 4.92 4.76 4.63 4.60 4.59 6.66 6.72 6.77 6.82 6.87 6.92 6.97 7.03 7.08 7.13 7.18 7.23 7.12 7.01 6.89 6.77 6.71 6.54 6.37 6.17 5.99 5.96 5.94 4.99 5.02 5.06 5.10 5.14 5.18 5.22 5.26 5.30 5.33 5.37 5.41 5.33 5.26 5.17 5.09 5.05 4.93 4.81 4.66 4.54 4.52 4.51 6.45 6.50 6.55 6.60 6.65 6.70 6.75 6.80 6.85 6.90 6.95 7.00 6.90 6.80 6.70 6.59 6.54 6.38 6.23 6.03 5.87 5.84 5.83 8.02 8.02 8.01 8.00 8.00 7.99 7.99 7.98 7.97 7.97 7.96 7.95 7.79 7.62 7.46 7.29 7.00 6.91 6.82 6.67 6.53 6.44 6.41 10.31 10.31 10.30 10.29 10.28 10.27 10.27 10.26 10.25 10.24 10.24 10.23 10.01 9.80 9.59 9.37 9.00 8.88 8.77 8.58 8.39 8.28 8.24 5.09 5.13 5.17 5.21 5.25 5.29 5.33 5.37 5.41 5.45 5.49 5.52 5.45 5.38 5.30 5.21 5.10 5.02 4.94 4.79 4.67 4.65 4.64 6.59 6.64 6.69 6.74 6.79 6.84 6.90 6.95 7.00 7.05 7.10 7.15 7.05 6.96 6.85 6.75 6.60 6.50 6.40 6.20 6.05 6.02 6.01 86 / 72 TC SHC 8.57 8.56 8.55 8.55 8.54 8.53 8.53 8.52 8.51 8.51 8.50 8.49 8.33 8.16 7.99 7.83 7.64 7.50 7.35 7.21 7.06 6.97 6.94 11.01 11.01 11.00 10.99 10.98 10.97 10.96 10.96 10.95 10.94 10.93 10.92 10.71 10.49 10.28 10.06 9.83 9.64 9.45 9.26 9.08 8.96 8.93 5.13 5.17 5.21 5.25 5.29 5.33 5.37 5.41 5.45 5.49 5.53 5.57 5.50 5.43 5.36 5.29 5.26 5.14 5.03 4.89 4.77 4.76 4.75 6.64 6.70 6.75 6.80 6.85 6.90 6.95 7.00 7.06 7.11 7.16 7.21 7.12 7.03 6.94 6.84 6.80 6.66 6.51 6.33 6.18 6.15 6.15 90 / 75 TC SHC 8.99 8.99 8.98 8.97 8.97 8.96 8.95 8.94 8.94 8.93 8.92 8.92 8.75 8.58 8.41 8.24 8.06 7.91 7.77 7.62 7.48 7.39 7.36 11.56 11.55 11.54 11.54 11.53 11.52 11.51 11.50 11.49 11.48 11.47 11.47 11.25 11.03 10.82 10.60 10.36 10.17 9.99 9.80 9.61 9.50 9.46 5.23 5.27 5.31 5.35 5.39 5.43 5.47 5.52 5.56 5.60 5.64 5.68 5.61 5.55 5.48 5.40 5.38 5.27 5.16 5.02 4.90 4.89 4.89 6.77 6.82 6.87 6.93 6.98 7.03 7.09 7.14 7.19 7.24 7.29 7.35 7.26 7.18 7.09 6.99 6.96 6.82 6.68 6.50 6.35 6.33 6.32 Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette LCN097HV4 9,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 117 FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Cooling Capacity Table Table 67:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LCN127HV4 12,000 LMCN185HV 18,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC 11.76 11.75 11.75 11.74 11.73 11.72 11.71 11.70 11.69 11.68 11.67 11.66 11.38 11.10 10.83 10.55 10.25 10.00 9.75 9.50 9.25 9.10 9.05 17.65 17.63 17.62 17.60 17.59 17.58 17.56 17.55 17.54 17.52 17.51 17.50 17.08 16.66 16.24 15.82 15.37 14.99 14.62 14.24 13.87 13.65 13.57 8.51 8.57 8.64 8.71 8.77 8.84 8.90 8.97 9.03 9.10 9.17 9.23 9.08 8.92 8.76 8.60 8.51 8.28 8.05 7.77 7.54 7.49 7.47 12.33 12.43 12.52 12.62 12.71 12.81 12.90 13.00 13.10 13.19 13.29 13.38 13.16 12.93 12.70 12.46 12.33 12.00 11.67 11.27 10.93 10.85 10.83 73 / 61 TC SHC 12.49 12.48 12.48 12.47 12.46 12.45 12.44 12.43 12.42 12.41 12.40 12.39 12.11 11.82 11.54 11.26 10.96 10.71 10.46 10.21 9.96 9.81 9.76 18.74 18.73 18.71 18.70 18.68 18.67 18.66 18.64 18.63 18.61 18.60 18.58 18.16 17.74 17.32 16.90 16.44 16.06 15.69 15.32 14.94 14.72 14.64 8.99 9.06 9.13 9.20 9.27 9.34 9.41 9.47 9.54 9.61 9.68 9.75 9.60 9.45 9.29 9.13 9.05 8.82 8.59 8.31 8.08 8.03 8.01 13.02 13.13 13.23 13.33 13.43 13.53 13.63 13.73 13.83 13.93 14.03 14.13 13.92 13.70 13.47 13.23 13.12 12.78 12.45 12.05 11.71 11.64 11.62 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 13.22 13.21 13.20 13.19 13.18 13.17 13.16 13.15 13.14 13.13 13.12 13.11 12.83 12.55 12.26 11.98 11.67 11.42 11.17 10.92 10.67 10.52 10.48 19.84 19.82 19.81 19.79 19.78 19.76 19.75 19.73 19.72 19.70 19.69 19.67 19.24 18.82 18.40 17.97 17.51 17.13 16.76 16.39 16.01 15.79 15.71 8.70 8.77 8.84 8.90 8.97 9.04 9.11 9.17 9.24 9.31 9.38 9.44 9.31 9.17 9.03 8.88 8.82 8.61 8.40 8.14 7.92 7.88 7.87 12.61 12.71 12.81 12.91 13.00 13.10 13.20 13.30 13.39 13.49 13.59 13.69 13.49 13.30 13.09 12.88 12.78 12.47 12.17 11.79 11.48 11.42 11.40 13.75 13.74 13.73 13.72 13.71 13.70 13.69 13.68 13.67 13.66 13.65 13.64 13.35 13.07 12.78 12.50 12.00 11.84 11.69 11.44 11.19 11.04 10.99 20.63 20.61 20.60 20.58 20.57 20.55 20.53 20.52 20.50 20.49 20.47 20.46 20.03 19.60 19.17 18.75 18.00 17.77 17.53 17.16 16.79 16.56 16.49 8.88 8.95 9.02 9.09 9.16 9.23 9.30 9.37 9.44 9.50 9.57 9.64 9.51 9.38 9.24 9.10 8.90 8.76 8.62 8.37 8.15 8.12 8.11 12.88 12.98 13.08 13.18 13.28 13.38 13.48 13.58 13.68 13.78 13.87 13.97 13.79 13.60 13.40 13.19 12.90 12.70 12.50 12.13 11.82 11.77 11.75 86 / 72 TC SHC 14.69 14.67 14.66 14.65 14.64 14.63 14.62 14.61 14.60 14.59 14.57 14.56 14.27 13.99 13.70 13.42 13.10 12.85 12.60 12.35 12.10 11.95 11.90 22.03 22.01 22.00 21.98 21.96 21.94 21.93 21.91 21.89 21.88 21.86 21.84 21.41 20.98 20.55 20.12 19.65 19.28 18.90 18.53 18.15 17.93 17.85 8.96 9.03 9.10 9.17 9.24 9.31 9.38 9.45 9.52 9.58 9.65 9.72 9.60 9.48 9.36 9.22 9.18 8.98 8.78 8.53 8.33 8.30 8.29 12.98 13.09 13.19 13.29 13.39 13.49 13.59 13.69 13.79 13.89 13.99 14.09 13.92 13.75 13.56 13.37 13.30 13.01 12.73 12.36 12.07 12.03 12.01 90 / 75 TC SHC 15.42 15.40 15.39 15.38 15.37 15.36 15.35 15.33 15.32 15.31 15.30 15.29 15.00 14.71 14.42 14.13 13.81 13.56 13.31 13.07 12.82 12.67 12.62 23.12 23.11 23.09 23.07 23.05 23.04 23.02 23.00 22.98 22.97 22.95 22.93 22.50 22.06 21.63 21.20 20.72 20.35 19.97 19.60 19.22 19.00 18.92 9.13 9.20 9.27 9.34 9.41 9.48 9.55 9.62 9.70 9.77 9.84 9.91 9.79 9.68 9.56 9.43 9.39 9.20 9.01 8.76 8.56 8.54 8.53 13.23 13.33 13.44 13.54 13.64 13.75 13.85 13.95 14.05 14.16 14.26 14.36 14.20 14.03 13.85 13.67 13.61 13.33 13.05 12.70 12.41 12.37 12.36 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. 118 | CEILING-CASSET TE Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Heating Capacity Table Table 68:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LMCN077HV 7,000 64 TC Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 TC TC °F DB °F WB 61 TC 0 -0.4 4.17 4.11 4.07 72 TC 75 TC 4.05 3.99 3.82 5 4.5 4.70 4.64 4.60 4.58 4.52 4.34 10 9 5.22 5.17 5.13 5.11 5.05 4.87 17 15 5.93 5.87 5.83 5.81 5.75 5.56 20 19 6.19 6.13 6.09 6.08 6.02 5.81 25 23 6.63 6.57 6.53 6.52 6.46 6.22 30 28 7.01 6.96 6.92 6.90 6.84 6.63 35 32 7.40 7.34 7.30 7.28 7.22 7.04 40 36 7.74 7.68 7.64 7.62 7.56 7.39 45 41 8.08 8.02 7.98 7.96 7.90 7.73 47 43 8.22 8.16 8.12 8.10 8.04 7.87 50 46 8.35 8.29 8.25 8.23 8.17 7.98 55 51 8.57 8.51 8.47 8.45 8.39 8.16 60 56 8.57 8.51 8.47 8.45 8.39 8.20 63 59 8.57 8.51 8.47 8.45 8.39 8.22 68 64 8.57 8.51 8.47 8.45 8.39 8.25 0 -0.4 5.35 5.28 5.23 5.20 5.12 4.90 5 4.5 6.03 5.95 5.90 5.88 5.80 5.58 10 9 6.71 6.63 6.58 6.56 6.48 6.26 17 15 7.61 7.54 7.49 7.46 7.39 7.14 20 19 7.95 7.88 7.83 7.80 7.72 7.46 25 23 8.52 8.44 8.39 8.37 8.29 7.99 30 28 9.01 8.93 8.88 8.86 8.78 8.52 35 32 9.50 9.42 9.37 9.34 9.27 9.04 40 36 9.94 9.86 9.81 9.78 9.71 9.48 45 41 10.37 10.30 10.25 10.22 10.15 9.92 47 43 10.55 10.48 10.43 10.40 10.32 10.10 50 46 10.72 10.64 10.59 10.57 10.49 10.24 55 51 11.00 10.93 10.88 10.85 10.78 10.48 60 56 11.00 10.93 10.88 10.85 10.78 10.52 63 59 11.00 10.93 10.88 10.85 10.78 10.55 68 64 11.00 10.93 10.88 10.85 10.78 10.60 Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette LCN097HV4 9,000 Outdoor Air Temp. TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 119 FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Heating Capacity Table Table 69:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LCN127HV4 12,000 LMCN185HV 18,000 Outdoor Air Temp. 64 TC Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 TC TC °F DB °F WB 61 TC 0 -0.4 7.10 7.00 6.93 72 TC 75 TC 6.90 6.80 6.50 5 4.5 8.00 7.90 7.83 7.80 7.70 7.40 10 9 8.90 8.80 8.73 8.70 8.60 8.30 17 15 10.10 10.00 9.93 9.90 9.80 9.48 20 19 10.55 10.45 10.38 10.35 10.25 9.90 25 23 11.30 11.20 11.13 11.10 11.00 10.60 30 28 11.95 11.85 11.78 11.75 11.65 11.30 35 32 12.60 12.50 12.43 12.40 12.30 12.00 40 36 13.18 13.08 13.02 12.98 12.88 12.58 45 41 13.77 13.67 13.60 13.57 13.47 13.17 47 43 14.00 13.90 13.83 13.80 13.70 13.40 50 46 14.23 14.13 14.06 14.03 13.93 13.59 55 51 14.60 14.50 14.43 14.40 14.30 13.90 60 56 14.60 14.50 14.43 14.40 14.30 13.96 63 59 14.60 14.50 14.43 14.40 14.30 14.00 68 64 14.60 14.50 14.43 14.40 14.30 14.06 0 -0.4 10.70 10.55 10.45 10.40 10.25 9.80 5 4.5 12.06 11.91 11.81 11.76 11.61 11.15 10 9 13.41 13.26 13.16 13.11 12.96 12.51 17 15 15.22 15.07 14.97 14.92 14.77 14.29 20 19 15.90 15.75 15.65 15.60 15.45 14.92 25 23 17.03 16.88 16.78 16.73 16.58 15.98 30 28 18.01 17.86 17.76 17.71 17.56 17.03 35 32 18.99 18.84 18.74 18.69 18.54 18.09 40 36 19.87 19.72 19.62 19.57 19.42 18.97 45 41 20.75 20.60 20.50 20.45 20.30 19.85 47 43 21.10 20.95 20.85 20.80 20.65 20.20 50 46 21.44 21.29 21.19 21.14 20.99 20.48 55 51 22.01 21.86 21.75 21.70 21.55 20.95 60 56 22.01 21.86 21.75 21.70 21.55 21.04 63 59 22.01 21.86 21.75 21.70 21.55 21.10 68 64 22.01 21.86 21.75 21.70 21.55 21.20 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 120 | CEILING-CASSET TE Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Acoustic Data Figure 160: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. • Measurement taken 4.9′ away from the unit. • Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full load normal operating condition. • Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is installed. • Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3. • Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745. Ceiling Table 70: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]). Model No. 4.9 ft. Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating) Medium Fan Speed Low Fan Speed 31 36 27 33 24 30 LCN127HV4 38 35 32 LMCN185HV 38 37 34 LMCN077HV Microphone LCN097HV4 Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette High Fan Speed Figure 161: LMCN077HV and LCN097HV4 Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. 90 90 NC-60 NC-55 50 NC-50 NC-45 40 NC-40 NC-35 30 NC-30 NC-25 20 Approximate Hearing Threshold 63 70 70 Sound Pressure Level (dB re 20uPa) Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (dB re 20Pa) NC-65 60 Sound Pressure Level (dB re 20uPa) 80 80 70 10 LCN097HV4 LMCN097HV LMCN077HV 80 60 60 50 50 40 40 30 30 20 20 NC-20 NC-15 125 250 500 1000 2000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 4000 8000 10 10 63 63 125 125250 500 250 1000 500 2000 1000 NC-70 NC-70 NC-65 NC-65 NC-60 NC-60 NC-55 NC-55 NC-50 NC-50 NC-45 NC-45 NC-40 NC-40 NC-35 NC-35 NC-30 NC-30 NC-25 NC-25 NC-20 NC-20 NC-15 NC-15 4000 2000 80004000 8000 Octave BandBand Center Frequency (Hz) Octave Center Frequency (Hz) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 121 FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Acoustic Data Figure 162: LCN127HV4 and LMCN185HV Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. 70 70 70 NC-65 NC-65 60 60 NC-60 NC-60 NC-55 NC-55 50 50 NC-50 NC-50 NC-45 NC-45 40 40 NC-40 NC-40 NC-35 NC-35 30 30 NC-30 NC-30 NC-25 NC-25 20 20 Approximate Approximate Hearing Hearing Threshold Threshold 10 10 63 63 125125 250 250 NC-15 NC-15 500 500 1000 1000 2000 2000 4000 8000 8000 4000 | CEILING-CASSET TE LMCN185HV NC-65 60 NC-60 NC-55 50 NC-50 NC-45 40 NC-40 NC-35 30 NC-30 NC-25 20 NC-20 NC-20 Octave center frequency Octave band band center frequency (Hz) (Hz) 122 Sound pressure level (0 dB = 20 µPa) Sound pressure level (0 dB = 20 µPa) 80 Sound pressure level (0 dB = 20 µPa) Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual LCN127HV4 LMCN125HV 80 80 10 Approximate Hearing Threshold 63 NC-20 NC-15 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Octave band center frequency (Hz) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Figure 163:LMCN077HV Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Cooling Discharge angle: 40° Air velocity [ft/s] Air velocity [ft/s] 9f t 6.6 6.6 4.9 3.3 4.9 3.3 6.6 7f t 4.9 4.9 5f t 0f t 5 ft 8 ft 7f t 3.3 1.6 1.6 3f t 1.6 9f t 6.6 3.3 1.6 8f t Heating Discharge angle: 50° 0f t 8f t 5f t 0f t 3f t 5 ft 8 ft Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Temperature [°F] Temperature [°F] 9f t 9f t 91 68 68 81 75 75 0f t 5 ft 81 0f t 8f t 8 ft 7f t 64 75 75 3f t 72 5f t 70 64 72 91 70 7f t 54 54 8f t 0f t 5f t 0f t 3f t 5 ft 8 ft 0f t Figure 164:LCN097HV4 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Cooling Discharge angle: 40° Heating Discharge angle: 50° Air velocity [ft/s] Air velocity [ft/s] 9ft 6.6 6.6 4.9 6.6 4.9 7ft 4.9 3.3 3.3 3.3 1.6 8ft 7ft 3.3 1.6 3ft 9ft 6.6 4.9 1.6 3ft 1.6 5ft 0ft 0ft 8ft 5ft 5ft 8ft 0ft 0ft 8ft 5ft Temperature [°F] Temperature [°F] 9ft 9ft 64 91 64 68 7ft 68 72 91 86 72 70 75 7ft 86 81 81 75 75 8ft 70 3ft 3ft 75 5ft 0ft 5ft 0ft 8ft 8ft 5ft 0ft Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 5ft 0ft 8ft CEILING-CASSET TE | 123 FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Figure 165:LCN127HV4 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Cooling Discharge angle: 40° Heating Discharge angle: 50° Air velocity [ft/s] Air velocity [ft/s] 9ft 6.6 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual 6.6 4.6 7ft 4.6 4.6 3.3 1.6 3ft 0ft 1.6 1.6 0ft 8ft 5ft 8ft 0ft 5ft 0ft 8ft 5ft Temperature [°F] Temperature [°F] 9ft 9ft 64 64 91 91 7ft 7ft 68 68 72 72 75 75 3ft 3ft 81 81 75 75 8ft 3ft 3.3 3.3 1.6 5ft 6.6 7ft 4.6 3.3 8ft 9ft 6.6 5ft 0ft 0ft 8ft 5ft 8ft 0ft 5ft 0ft 8ft 5ft Figure 166:LMCN185HV Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts. Cooling Discharge angle : 40° Heating Discharge angle : 50° Air velocity [ft/s] Air velocity [ft/s] 9ft 6.6 6.6 4.9 3.3 10ft 7ft 6.6 7ft 4.9 3.3 0ft 3ft 3.3 1.6 7ft 10ft 13ft 0ft Temperature [°F] 13ft 10ft 7ft 3ft 0ft 64 68 72 91 7ft 72 75 124 7ft 10ft 13ft 0ft 75 9ft 91 86 70 3ft 7ft 3ft Temperature [°F] 64 68 10ft 3ft 1.6 9ft 13ft 7ft 4.9 3.3 3ft 1.6 3ft 6.6 4.9 1.6 13ft 9ft 7ft 86 70 81 81 3ft 75 75 3ft | CEILING-CASSET TE 0ft 3ft 7ft 10ft 13ft 0ft 13ft 10ft 7ft 3ft Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 0ft 3ft 7ft 10ft 13ft 0ft MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Refrigerant Flow Diagram Figure 167: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram. Gas pipe connection port (flare connection) Heat exchanger Heating Cooling Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor Turbo fan M Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor Liquid pipe connection port (flare connection) Table 71: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters. Model No. Vapor (inch) Liquid (inch) LMCN077HV LCN097HV4 Ø3/8 Ø1/4 LCN127HV4 LMCN185HV Ø1/2 Table 72: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. Description (Based on Cooling Mode) PCB Connector Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor CN-ROOM Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/IN Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/OUT Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 125 FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Wiring Diagram Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 168: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit Wiring Diagram. 126 | CEILING-CASSET TE Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Factory Supplied Parts and Materials Factory Supplied Parts Table 73: Parts Table. Part Quantity Drain Hose Quantity One (1) Zip Ties Four (4) Metal Clamp Two (2) Conduit Bracket One (1) Insulation for Fittings One (1) Set M4 Screws Two (2) 1 Image Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Part Washer for Hanging Bracket Image For Vapor Piping For Liquid Piping Wireless Handheld Controller with One (1) Holder 1 (AKB73757604) Eight (8) Wireless Handheld Controller for the four-way ceiling cassette indoor units is also referenced by Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB. Table 74:Required Accessory Table. Part Quantity Grille Kit (PT-QCHW0 or PT-UQC) One (1) Factory Supplied Materials • Installation Guide (template) • Owner’s Manual • Installation Manual WARNING Image Required Tools • • • • • Level Screwdriver Electric drill Hole core drill Flaring tool set • • • • Torque wrenches Hexagonal wrench Gas-leak detector Thermometer Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death. Note: Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 127 FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Selecting the Best Location Figure 169:Indoor Unit Clearance Requirements. ≥11-13/16 inches Ceiling Tile ≥19-11/16 inches • Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used. • Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored. • Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators. • Do not install the unit near a doorway. Ceiling Tile ≥19-11/16 inches ≤11-13/16 inches Don’ts Ceiling H = 6 feet to 12 feet Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked. Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily. Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration. Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor unit. • Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space. • Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit. ≥39-3/8 inches Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual • • • • ≥13/32 inches Do’s Floor The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed. Note: If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components. Installing in a High or Dropped Ceiling High or dropped ceilings, often found in commercial buildings and offices, may cause a wide temperature differentiation. To countermeasure: • Change the indoor unit mode selection to allow for higher ceilings (see table). • Install an air circulator. • Set the air discharge outlet so that heated air flows in a downward direction. • Use a dual door system to protect the building gate or exit. Table 75:Indoor Unit High Ceiling Mode Selection Options. Ceiling Height Mode Selection ≤7-1/2 feet Low Ceiling 7-1/2 feet to 8-7/8 feet Standard 8-7/8 feet to 10-3/16 feet High Ceiling 10-3/16 feet to 11-13/16 feet Very High Ceiling Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure: • Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three (3) degrees). • Add insulation between the floor joists. • Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor. Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum: • Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches thick). • Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick). • Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the conditioned space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation. 128 | CEILING-CASSET TE Figure 170:Installing in a Highly Humid Location. Ventilation Grille Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Installing Multiple Indoor Units in One Area Ensure there is enough space between indoor units, lighting fixtures, and ventilation fans / systems. Figure 171:Installing Multiple Indoor Units. Indoor unit Indoor unit Ventilator Lighting >59-1/16 inches >78-25/32 inches >118-5/32 inches Preparing the Installation Area and Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame 23-1/16 inches ~ 26 inches (Ceiling Opening) Unit Size 20-19/32 inches 12-9/16 inches 22-15/32 inches 3. Drill holes for the bolts. Use either a W 3/8 inch or a M10 size bolt. For easier installation, attach the accessories (except for the decoration panel) before hanging the indoor unit. Anchor Long nut or turnbuckle Suspension bolt Ceiling tile 18-5/32 inches Figure 174:Installation Diagram. Ceiling 7-3/32 inches Ceiling 22-15/32 inches Unit Size 23-1/16 inches ~ 26 inches (Ceiling Opening) 20-3/8 inches 2. Choose the location for the indoor unit, and then mark where the bolts, refrigerant piping, and drain hose should be. Suspension bolt angle should account for drain direction. Figure 173:Installing the Hanging Bolt in the Ceiling. Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette 1. Installation guide (template) depicts the exact dimensions necessary for the ceiling opening. Figure 172:Ceiling Opening Dimensions and Bolt Locations. 20-3/8 inches Preparing the Installation Area Leave 1-9/16 inches of the bolt beneath the bracket Indoor Unit Ceiling tile Ceiling tile Leave a space of 1-3/16 inches ± 1/8 inches between the bottom of the indoor unit and the ceiling Installation Guide (template) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Install the four screws at the location marked on the template Open the ceiling tiles that are along the outside edge of the installation guide. CEILING-CASSET TE | 129 FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual For New Ceilings Figure 175:Hanging the Indoor Unit. 1. Use a sunken insert, a sunken anchor, or any other field-supplied part to reinforce the Hanging bolt ceiling so that it can bear the weight of the indoor unit. Use a temporary washer plate (W3/8 or M10) to more easily set up the unit suspension location. Nut 2. Ceiling height is shown on the side of the installation guide (template). Adjust the Flat washer for M10 (W3/8 or M10) height of the unit accordingly. Adjust the clearance before hanging the indoor unit. (field supplied) Spring washer 3. Refer to the installation guide (template) for the dimensions to the ceiling opening. (M10) Match the center of the indoor unit (labeled) to the center indicated on the installation guide. Flat washer for M10 4. Align the installation guide (template) with the label attached to the unit (affixing the (field supplied) template to the unit if desired) to properly place the unit. Nut 5. Remove the temporary washer plate and position the indoor unit hanger brackets (W3/8 or M10) on the bolts. Secure with nuts and washers on the top and bottom of the hanger brackets. 6. Ceiling-cassette indoor units are equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch, therefore, the unit must be installed horizontally or condensate will drip out and cause product malfunction. Measure the unit at each corner to verify that it is level. 7. Remove the installation guide (template). For Existing Ceilings 1. Use anchors when installing the indoor unit in an existing ceiling. 2. Ceiling height is shown on the side of the installation guide (template). Adjust the height of the unit accordingly. Adjust the clearance before hanging the indoor unit. 3. Remove the temporary washer plate and position the indoor unit hanger brackets on the bolts. Secure with nuts and washers on the top and bottom of the hanger brackets. 4. Ceiling-cassette indoor units are equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch, therefore, the unit must be installed horizontally or condensate will drip out and cause product malfunction. Measure the unit at each corner to verify that it is level. 5. Remove the installation guide (template). Installing the Drain System Figure 176: Indoor Unit Drain Piping. • Drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down. • Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit when connecting the fieldsupplied drain piping. • Drain piping specifications: - Indoor Unit Drain Connection: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter. - Field-Supplied Drain Piping: Polyvinyl chloride piping with 1-inch inside diameter and pipe fittings. Checking the Drain Pump The unit uses a drain pump to remove condensate. The pump must be tested before the system operates. • Connect flexible drain hose to the field-installed drain piping; leave it as is until the test is complete. • Pour water into the flexible drain hose and check for leaks. • After power wiring installation is complete, operate the drain pump to see if it sounds and functions properly. • After the test is complete, connect the flexible drain hose to the indoor unit drain port. 1/50~ 1/100 <27-9/16 inches Figure 177:Checking the Drain Pump. Pour Water Drain Pump | CEILING-CASSET TE Field-Installed Drain Piping Drain Port Glue the Joint Drain Hose Connection Use the clip (accessory) Drain Pan 130 Flexible drain hose (accessory) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Liquid Piping Connection Insulation for Refrigerant Piping MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR (Field-Supplied) UNITS MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Clamp for Insulation (Field-Supplied) Insulation (Field-Supplied) Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping Vapor Piping Connection Figure 178:Insulating the Piping. Insulation for Refrigerant Piping (Field-Supplied) Insulation for Field-Installed Piping (Field-Supplied) Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched. Refrigerant Piping Insulation Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit piping connections). Any exposed piping may generate condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F. Overlap the Insulation at the Connection Drain Piping Insulation Drain piping must have insulation a minimum of 7/32 inches thick. Ensure no gaps are present. 1. Overlap the insulation at the connection of the field-installed piping and the indoor unit piping. Tape together so that no gaps exist. 2. Secure insulation to the rear piping housing section with vinyl tape. 3. Bundle the piping and drain hose with tape where they meet at the back of the indoor unit frame. Position the drain hose at the bottom of the bundle (positioning the drain hose at the top of the bundle may cause the drain pan to overflow inside the indoor unit). Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines • • • • • • • Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals. Confirm power source specifications. Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient. Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate. Confirm cable thickness specifications. It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist. Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor. • Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death. Note: • Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation. A voltage drop may cause the following problems: • Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device. • Compressor will not receive the proper starting current. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 131 Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Installing the Insulation FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable Figure 179:Power Wiring and Communications Cable Connection Access. 2. Insert the power wiring / communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the sides of the indoor unit and control box. Pass the wiring through the designated access holes to prevent damage. To prevent electromagnetic interference and product malfunction, leave a space between the power wiring and communications cable outside of the indoor unit. 3. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit. Power Wiring Wired Controller Cable Control Box Cover Screws Control Box Cover 4. Neatly arrange power wiring / communications cable and secure with the appropriate cable restraint. When clamping, do not apply force to the wiring connections. 5. Firmly reattach the control box cover. Do not catch the wiring in the electric box cover and make sure the cover firmly closes. 6. Fill in any gaps around the wiring access holes with sealant to prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit. Wiring / Cable Connections Figure 180:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Connections. Indoor Unit Terminal Block 2(L2) 3 3 or S GND RD BR 1(L1) Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) BL GND GRN / YLW Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual 1. To access the terminal block, open the control box cover. Using a Conduit 1. Remove the rubber stopper on the indoor unit. Pass the power wiring / communications cable through the conduit, the conduit mounting plate, and to / through the control panel of the indoor unit. Figure 181:Using a Conduit. Rubber Stopper 2. Tighten the conduit and the conduit mounting plate together. 3. Connect the power wiring / communications cable to the indoor unit terminal block. 4. Screw the conduit mounting plate to the indoor unit. If the distance between the outdoor unit and indoor unit is greater than 131 feet, connect the power wiring and communications cable separately (i.e., a conduit cannot be used). 132 | CEILING-CASSET TE Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Conduit Bracket Cable Screws Conduit Ceiling cassette 4-way _ 19 MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Controller Options Four-way ceiling-concealed indoor units include a wireless handheld controller (AKB73757604)1, but optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. Wireless Handheld Controller Figure 182:AKB73757604 Wireless Handheld Controller. Table 76:AKB737576041 Wireless Handheld Controller Functions.2 Button Description Label 1 Vane Angle Button: Sets the angle to each vane. 2 Function Setting Button: Sets or clears auto clean, smart clean, electric heater, or individual vane angle control functions. 3 1 3 10 11 12 4 13 5 6 14 7 8 15 16 9 17 4 5 Operation Mode Sequence 6 Cooling Mode ↓ Auto Mode/Changeover ↓ Dehumidification Mode ↓ Heating Mode ↓ Fan Mode 7 On Time Button: Sets the time when the operation begins. 8 Sleep Timer Button: Sets the sleep mode operation. Set / Clear Button: Sets or cancels the timer, also sets the current time. Plasma Button: Starts or stops plasma-purification functions. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Room Temperature Setting Button: Raises or lowers temperature setpoint in cooling and heating operation. Operation mode selection button: Selects the operation mode. Indoor Fan Speed Button: Changes the fan speed to one of four choices: low, medium, high, and chaos. Room Temperature Check Button: Displays / checks the room temperature. Off Timer button: Sets the time when the operation ends. 16 Time Setting (Up / Down) / Light Button: Sets the timer and adjusts the brightness of the LED. 17 Reset Button: Resets the remote controller. Wireless Handheld Controller for the four-way ceiling cassette indoor units is also referenced by Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB. 2 Depending on the indoor unit model, some functions may not be supported or displayed. 1 Wired Controller Connections Figure 183:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block. Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) Indoor Unit Terminal Block 3(C) RD BL 1(L1 ) 2(L2) BR GRN / YLW GND 3 or S CN-REMO To Wired Controller GND Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. CEILING-CASSET TE | 133 Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette 2 On / Off Button: Turns the power on/off. Jet Cool: Sets the unit to super high fan speed when in cooling mode. Left / Right Air Flow Button (optional): Sets the desired left / right (horizontal) air flow direction. Up / Down Air flow Button: Stops or starts louver movement, and sets the desired air flow direction to up or down. FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Wired Controller Placement Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature. Do not install the wired controller near or in: • Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners • Hot or cold air from ducts • Radiant heat from the sun or appliances • Concealed pipes and chimneys • An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall Figure 184:Proper Location for the Wired Controller. YES TEMP Remote Controlle r NO ot e Cont NO 4 to 5 feet above the floor TEMP Rem TEMP Remote Controlle r roller NO Figure 185:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves. Hanging the Wired Controller 1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring / cable on applicable side. Top Top Back Right Side Right Side 2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself. 3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides. Figure 186:Attaching the Wall Plate. 4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller. Do not damage the controller components when removing. Figure 187:Installing / Removing the Controller. Installing the Controller Wall Removing the Controller Wall Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection Wall Wall Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described. 134 | CEILING-CASSET TE Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS MULTI F MAX Installation and Best Layout Practices PTVK430 Ventilation Kit Figure 188:PTVK430 Ventilation Kit. PTVK430 Ventilation Kit includes a flange for field-supplied ventilation pipe connection. Easily connects at the four-way ceiling-cassette three (3) inch fresh air knockout hole. Finalizing Indoor Unit Installation— Installing the Decoration Panel Decoration panel must be installed properly; cool air will leak from any gaps found between the indoor unit frame and the decoration panel, which will cause condensation to generate. 1. Remove the packaging, take out air inlet grille from the front panel (1A), and then remove the corner covers of the panel (1B). 1A Grille Corner Cover 3. Attach two screws on diagonal corners of each panel, but do not tighten completely (3). Screws to attach the panel to the indoor unit frame are factory-provided and can be found in the shipping box. 4. Verify the panel is aligned with the ceiling. Adjust the height by using the hanging bolts as shown (4). 1B Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette 2. Attach the panel to the indoor frame by inserting the hooks as shown (2). Figure 189:Installing the Decoration Panel. 2 3 4 5 Hook clip Hook 5. Attach the corner covers (5). 6. Unscrew the control panel cover (6). 7. Connect the one display connector (CN-DISP) and the two vane control connectors (CN-VANE1, CN-VANE2) of the front panel to the indoor unit PCB (7). 8. Close the control box cover. Attach the link on the front panel as shown (8). The link is supplied in the front panel shipping package. 9. Attach the other side of the link on the filter guide of the air inlet grille, then install the filter and the air inlet grille on the front panel (9). 6 Figure 190:Ensure that no gaps are present between the indoor unit frame and the decoration panel. 7 Screw Indoor Unit Ceiling Tile Insulation should fit tightly so that cool air does not leak Decoration panel CN VANE 1,2 8 Link CN DISP 9 Link Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Filter guide CEILING-CASSET TE | 135 TWO-WAY VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL AIR HANDLING INDOOR UNIT DATA “Mechanical Specifications” on page 137 “General Data / Specifications” on page 138 “Dimensions” on page 139 “Cooling Capacity Table” on page 140 “Heating Capacity Table” on page 141 “External Static Pressure” on page 142 “Acoustic Data” on page 143 “Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 144 “Wiring Diagram” on page 145 “Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 147 “Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 148 MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Mechanical Specifications and Features Two-way Vertical-Horizontal Air Handing Indoor Unit General All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling units are designed for high-speed air volume against an external static pressure up to 1.00″WG. Supply air opening is flanged to accept field-installed ductwork that cannot exceed the external static pressure limit of the unit. Coil Refrigerant System System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare, and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be field insulated. Electrical Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power with voltage variances of ±10%. Filter Assembly The unit includes a filter rack that can accept a field-supplied 16” x 20” x 1” filter cartridge. The filter rack has a guide to assist in centering the filters, and can be accessed from the front. Microprocessor Control Casing The casing is designed to mount fully concealed behind a wall or above a finished ceiling. Casing is manufactured of 22-gauge precoated metal and finished with a high-gloss baked enamel finish. Cold surfaces of the unit are covered internally with 1/2-inch polystyrene fiber insulation; inside surface of the pan assembly door access panel is treated with 1/2-inch polystyrene fiber insulation, encapsulated on both sides. The access panel is sealed along the edges with reinforced foil-faced covering, all access panels also have gasket seals to minimize air leaks. The two-way vertical-horizontal air handling unit can operate in one of two airflow configurations: the vertical (upflow) configuration or horizontal (left) end discharge. Supply air is drawn from the top, and there is a dedicated bottom vertical return. Unit is also designed to accept an internal, optional LG electrical strip heater. Fan Assembly and Control Figure 191: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit. The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided by temperature sensors within the indoor unit. A field-supplied communication cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit. Controls The indoor unit is supplied with an LG wired controller. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable. Condensate The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate. The units have an integral fan assembly consisting of galvanized Features • Inverter (Variable speed fan) • Control lock function • Auto operation • Dehumidifying function • Two thermistor control • Group control • External static pressure control • Self-diagnostics function • Wired thermostat included Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 137 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has a minimum of two rows of coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil. steel housing and a forward curve fan wheel. The fan motor is a brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) motor with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on vibration-attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digital control algorithm. The indoor fan has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. Each of the settings can be field-adjusted from the factory setting (RPM / ESP). The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed to most effectively achieve setpoint. TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS General Data / Specifications MULTI F MULTI F MAX Table 77: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit General Data. Model Name Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) LMVN240HV LMVN360HV 24,000 36,000 27,000 40,000 57-77 57-77 59-81 59-81 Sircocco Sircocco 96 x 1 182 x 1 Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct 710 / 640 / 480 990 / 880 / 800 1.00 1.00 R410A R410A EEV EEV 208-230, 1, 60 208-230, 1, 60 1 Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Operating Range Cooling (°F WB) Heating (°F DB) Fan Type Motor Output (W) x Qty. Motor/Drive Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) at 0.5"WG ESP Maximum External Static Pressure (in. WG) Unit Data Refrigerant Type2 Refrigerant Control Power Supply V, Ø, Hz 3 Rated Amps (A) 0.59 1.12 43 / 42 / 41 45 / 44 / 43 18 x 48-21/32 x 21-1/4 18 x 48-21/32 x 21-1/4 117 121 130 135 4 x 18 4 x 18 (2 x 24 x 18) x 2 (3 x 24 x 18) x 2 Liquid (in.) 1/4 3/8 Vapor (in.) 1/2 5/8 3/4 FPT 3/4 FPT 3/4 FPT 3/4 FPT Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L)4 at 0.3"WG ESP Dimensions (W x H x D, in.) Net Weight (lbs.) Shipping Weight (lbs.) Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG) 5 Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number Piping Primary Drain I.D. (in.) Secondary Drain I.D. (in.) Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 2 This unit comes with a dry helium charge. 1 138 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V. 4 Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during operation. 5 All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs must be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 3 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Dimensions Figure 192: LMVN240HV and LMVN360HV Dimensions. 18 17 D 12-1/8 21-1/4 W 1-9/16 H 1-15/16 1-5/8 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling 1-15/16 2-1/16 2-1/8 1-9/16 48-21/32 49-5/16 2-9/16 1-1/2 14-5/16 4-11/16 1-9/16 9-15/16 13 LMVN240HV LMVN360HV Model 18 W H Unit: Inch D 48-21/32 21-1/4 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 139 MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 78: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LMVN240HV 24,000 LMVN360HV 36,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC 23.53 23.51 23.49 23.47 23.46 23.44 23.42 23.40 23.38 23.37 23.35 23.33 22.77 22.21 21.65 21.09 20.49 19.99 19.49 18.99 18.49 18.19 18.10 35.29 35.26 35.24 35.21 35.18 35.16 35.13 35.10 35.08 35.05 35.02 34.99 34.15 33.31 32.48 31.64 30.74 29.99 29.24 28.49 27.74 27.29 27.14 17.89 18.03 18.17 18.31 18.45 18.59 18.73 18.87 19.00 19.14 19.28 19.42 19.10 18.77 18.43 18.08 17.89 17.41 16.93 16.35 15.86 15.75 15.71 26.84 27.05 27.26 27.47 27.67 27.88 28.09 28.30 28.51 28.71 28.92 29.13 28.65 28.16 27.64 27.12 26.84 26.12 25.40 24.53 23.80 23.62 23.56 73 / 61 TC SHC 24.99 24.97 24.95 24.93 24.91 24.89 24.87 24.85 24.84 24.82 24.80 24.78 24.21 23.65 23.09 22.53 21.92 21.42 20.92 20.42 19.92 19.62 19.52 37.48 37.45 37.43 37.40 37.37 37.34 37.31 37.28 37.25 37.23 37.20 37.17 36.32 35.47 34.63 33.79 32.88 32.13 31.38 30.63 29.88 29.43 29.28 18.90 19.05 19.20 19.34 19.49 19.64 19.78 19.93 20.07 20.22 20.37 20.51 20.20 19.88 19.55 19.21 19.03 18.55 18.07 17.49 17.00 16.89 16.86 28.35 28.57 28.79 29.01 29.23 29.45 29.67 29.89 30.11 30.33 30.55 30.77 30.30 29.82 29.32 28.81 28.55 27.83 27.11 26.23 25.49 25.34 25.29 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 26.45 26.43 26.41 26.39 26.37 26.35 26.33 26.31 26.29 26.27 26.25 26.23 25.66 25.09 24.53 23.96 23.35 22.85 22.35 21.85 21.35 21.05 20.95 39.67 39.64 39.61 39.58 39.55 39.52 39.49 39.46 39.43 39.40 39.37 39.34 38.49 37.64 36.79 35.94 35.02 34.27 33.52 32.77 32.02 31.57 31.43 18.30 18.44 18.59 18.73 18.87 19.01 19.15 19.30 19.44 19.58 19.72 19.86 19.58 19.30 18.99 18.69 18.55 18.10 17.66 17.12 16.66 16.58 16.55 27.45 27.66 27.88 28.09 28.31 28.52 28.73 28.94 29.16 29.37 29.58 29.79 29.37 28.94 28.49 28.03 27.82 27.15 26.49 25.67 24.99 24.87 24.82 27.50 27.48 27.46 27.44 27.42 27.40 27.38 27.36 27.34 27.32 27.29 27.27 26.70 26.13 25.57 25.00 24.00 23.69 23.38 22.88 22.38 22.08 21.98 41.26 41.23 41.19 41.16 41.13 41.10 41.07 41.04 41.01 40.97 40.94 40.91 40.05 39.20 38.35 37.50 36.00 35.53 35.07 34.32 33.57 33.12 32.97 18.69 18.83 18.98 19.12 19.27 19.41 19.56 19.70 19.85 19.99 20.13 20.28 20.01 19.73 19.44 19.14 18.72 18.43 18.14 17.60 17.15 17.07 17.05 28.03 28.25 28.47 28.68 28.90 29.12 29.34 29.55 29.77 29.99 30.20 30.42 30.01 29.60 29.16 28.71 28.08 27.65 27.21 26.40 25.72 25.61 25.57 TC 86 / 72 SHC 29.37 29.35 29.33 29.30 29.28 29.26 29.24 29.21 29.19 29.17 29.15 29.13 28.55 27.97 27.40 26.83 26.20 25.70 25.20 24.70 24.20 23.90 23.81 44.06 44.02 43.99 43.96 43.92 43.89 43.86 43.82 43.79 43.76 43.72 43.69 42.82 41.96 41.10 40.25 39.30 38.55 37.80 37.05 36.31 35.86 35.71 18.84 18.99 19.14 19.28 19.43 19.58 19.72 19.87 20.01 20.16 20.30 20.45 20.20 19.95 19.68 19.40 19.30 18.88 18.47 17.94 17.51 17.46 17.44 28.26 28.49 28.71 28.93 29.15 29.37 29.58 29.80 30.02 30.24 30.46 30.67 30.30 29.92 29.52 29.10 28.95 28.32 27.70 26.92 26.27 26.18 26.15 TC 90 / 75 SHC 30.83 30.81 30.79 30.76 30.74 30.72 30.69 30.67 30.64 30.62 30.60 30.57 29.99 29.42 28.84 28.27 27.63 27.13 26.63 26.13 25.63 25.33 25.23 46.25 46.21 46.18 46.14 46.11 46.07 46.04 46.00 45.97 45.93 45.90 45.86 44.99 44.12 43.26 42.40 41.44 40.69 39.94 39.20 38.45 38.00 37.85 19.20 19.35 19.50 19.65 19.80 19.95 20.10 20.24 20.39 20.54 20.69 20.84 20.60 20.36 20.10 19.84 19.75 19.35 18.94 18.42 18.00 17.96 17.94 28.80 29.02 29.25 29.47 29.70 29.92 30.14 30.37 30.59 30.81 31.03 31.26 30.90 30.54 30.15 29.76 29.63 29.02 28.41 27.64 27.01 26.93 26.91 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. 140 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 79: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LMVN240HV 24,000 61 64 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 72 75 °F DB °F WB TC TC TC TC TC TC 0 -0.4 13.89 13.70 13.57 13.50 13.30 12.72 5 4.5 15.65 15.46 15.33 15.26 15.07 14.48 10 9 17.41 17.22 17.09 17.02 16.83 16.24 17 15 19.76 19.57 19.43 19.37 19.17 18.55 20 19 20.64 20.45 20.32 20.25 20.05 19.37 25 23 22.11 21.91 21.78 21.72 21.52 20.74 30 28 23.38 23.18 23.05 22.99 22.79 22.11 35 32 24.65 24.46 24.33 24.26 24.07 23.48 40 36 25.79 25.60 25.47 25.40 25.21 24.62 45 41 26.93 26.74 26.61 26.54 26.35 25.76 47 43 27.39 27.20 27.07 27.00 26.80 26.22 50 46 27.83 27.64 27.51 27.44 27.24 26.58 55 51 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.20 60 56 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.32 63 59 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.39 68 64 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.51 0 -0.4 20.58 20.29 20.10 20.00 19.71 18.84 5 4.5 23.19 22.90 22.71 22.61 22.32 21.45 10 9 25.80 25.51 25.31 25.22 24.93 24.06 17 15 29.28 28.99 28.79 28.70 28.41 27.48 20 19 30.58 30.29 30.10 30.00 29.71 28.70 25 23 32.75 32.46 32.27 32.17 31.88 30.72 30 28 34.64 34.35 34.15 34.06 33.77 32.75 35 32 36.52 36.23 36.04 35.94 35.65 34.78 40 36 38.21 37.92 37.73 37.63 37.34 36.47 45 41 39.90 39.61 39.42 39.32 39.03 38.16 47 43 40.58 40.29 40.10 40.00 39.71 38.84 50 46 41.23 40.94 40.75 40.65 40.36 39.38 55 51 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.29 60 56 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.47 63 59 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.58 68 64 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.76 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling LMVN360HV 36,000 Outdoor Air Temp. TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 141 MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS External Static Pressure Table 80: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit External Static Pressure Setting Values Table. Static Pressure (in. wg) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 Model No. / Nominal Capacity Airflow Rate / CFM of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual LMVN240HV 24,000 LMVN360HV 36,000 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 98 96 92 1032 103 101 982 962 922 1032 1032 1012 982 962 922 1032 1032 1012 982 962 922 1032 1032 1012 Setting Value at (in. wg)1 710 640 480 990 880 800 56 53 53 80 65 65 67 65 55 85 72 69 74 70 64 90 80 77 78 75 70 95 85 82 87 85 79 100 92 90 94 91 84 103 98 96 Unless otherwise noted, vertical-horizontal air handing units are UL listed up to 0.5 in. wg total static pressure, including coil, case, duct work pressure drop, air filter, and largest kW size heater. Internal static pressure includes coil and case only. 2 Airflow rate (CFM) decreases by 3% per 0.1 in. wg. 3 Maximum airflow rate is 400 CFM per ton. (For the 24,000 Btu/h unit, the maximum airflow rate is 2 x 400 = 800 CFM). If airflow is set at the maximum rate, the external static pressure value must be increased from high speed setting value to: From 24kBtu/h of capacity: 4; From 36kBtu/h of capacity: 5 4 High static pressure is 0.5 in. wg (factory setting); low static pressure is 0.3 in. wg. 1 Note: If external static pressure is not set correctly, the air conditioning system may not operate properly or may malfunction. Table 81: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Minimum Airflow by Heater Capacity. Heater Capacity (kW) Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) 5 10 15 480 CFM 480 CFM Not Available LMVN240HV (24,000) 780 CFM 780 CFM Not Available LMVN360HV (36,000) 20 Not Available Not Available Do not operate the air conditioning system using less than the minimum airflow. There is risk of fire and severe injury or death. Note: Do not operate the air conditioning system using less than the minimum airflow. There is risk of product damage. Table 82: Electric Heater Static Pressure Drop. Heater Capacity (kW) 0 5 10 Static Pressure Drop (in. wg) 0 -0.01 -0.02 Note: • The external static pressure value must be reset if an electric heater is installed. For each 0.01 in. wg. increase in static pressure, the external static pressure must increase by 1. • If the external static pressure is not set properly, the provided safety device will turn off the heater (according to airflow). Table 83: Field-Supplied Air Filter Static Pressure Drop Factors. Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LMVN240HV (24,000) LMVN360HV (36,000) Airflow Rate / CFM High Mid Low High Mid Low Static Pressure Drop (in. wg) 710 640 480 990 880 800 Note: -0.04 -0.03 -0.03 -0.07 -0.05 -0.05 • The external static pressure value must be reset if an air filter is installed. For each 0.01 in. wg. increase in static pressure, the external static pressure must increase by 1. • Factory tested with MERV 4 filter media. Fan speed set value when the unit is used with field-supplied filter media. 142 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Acoustic Data Measurement taken 3.3′ away from the unit. Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full load normal operating condition. Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is installed. • Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3. • Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745. 3.3 ft. Figure 193: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. • • Microphone With Case • Table 84: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]). 3.3 ft. Model No. 43 45 42 44 41 43 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling LMVN240HV LMVN360HV Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating) High Fan Speed Medium Fan Speed Low Fan Speed Figure 194: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. LMVN360HV 80 80 70 70 NC-65 60 NC-60 NC-55 50 NC-50 NC-45 40 NC-40 NC-35 30 NC-30 NC-25 20 10 Approximate Hearing Threshold 63 Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (dB = 20μPa) Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (dB = 20μPa) LMVN240HV 60 50 40 30 20 NC-20 NC-15 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 8000 10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 143 MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Refrigerant Flow Diagram Figure 195: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram. Gas pipe connection port (flare connection) Cooling Heating Thermistor for Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor for Evaporator Outlet Temperature Cross Flow Fan M Thermistor for Evaporator Inlet Temperature Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Heat Exchanger Liquid pipe connection port (flare connection) Table 85: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters. Model No. Vapor (inch) Liquid (inch) LMVN240HV 1/2 1/4 LMVN360HV 5/8 3/8 Table 86: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air-Handling Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. 144 Description (Based on Cooling Mode) PCB Connector Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor CN-ROOM Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/IN Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/OUT | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Figure 196: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air-Handling Indoor Unit Wiring Diagram. Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling : Factory Wiring : Field Wiring : OPTION Table 87: Wiring Diagram Connections. Connection Name Location Function CN-POWER AC power supply AC Power line input for indoor controller CN-MOTOR1 Fan motor output Motor output of BLDC CN-MOTOR2 Fan motor output Motor output of BLDC CN-FLOAT Float switch input Float switch sensing (water level sensor) CN-PIPE/IN Suction pipe sensor Pipe in thermistor CN-PIPE/OUT Discharge pipe sensor Pipe out thermistor CN-ROOM Room sensor Room thermistor CN-REMO Remote controller Remote control line CN-OPTION Option PCB Communication between main and option CN-ZONE Zone controller Zone control line CN-DISPLAY RF Remote controller RF Remote control line CN-CC Dry contact Dry contact line Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 145 MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Table 88: DIP Switch Settings. Dip Switch Settings Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual SW3 GROUP OFF ON Description Master Slave Group control setting using wired remote controller. Dry contact mode setting. 1. Variable: Auto/manual mode can be chosen using the wide wired remote controller or wireless remote controller (factory setting is the manual mode). 2. Auto: For dry contact, it is always auto mode. SW4 DRY CONTACT Variable Auto SW5 EXTRA1 Off On • ON: Fan operates continuously. • OFF: Default (Fan does not operate continuously). SW6 HEATER Off On • ON: Automatic heater operation. • OFF: Default (manual heater operation). 1. Indoor unit without electric heater. • DIP switch 1, 2, 6, 8 must be set to OFF. 2. Indoor unit with electric heater, DIP switches 5 and 6 must be set to ON. • SW 5 ON: Fan operates continuously. (Can have uninterrupted heating during defrost or oil return modes using continuous heater and fan operation.) • SW5 OFF: Fan discontinuous operation. (There would be reduction in heating capacity while defrosting or oil return operation.) • SW6 ON: Automatic heater operation. (Heater operates automatically using the heater algorithm.) • SW6 OFF: Manual heater operation. (On / off operation is set manually. Heater operation follows the heater algorithm.) 146 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Factory Supplied Parts and Materials Factory Supplied Materials • Owner’s Manual • Installation Manual • Simple Controller with Mode Selection (AKB72955816)1 Simple Mode Controllers for the vertical-horizontal air handling indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW. 1 Required Tools • • • • • Level Screwdriver Electric drill Hole core drill Flaring tool set • • • • Torque wrenches Hexagonal wrench Gas-leak detector Thermometer WARNING Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death. Note: Selecting the Best Location Do’s • Place the unit where air circulation through the ducts will not be blocked. • Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily. • Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration. • Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor unit. • Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space. • Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit. Don’ts • Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used. • Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored. • Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators. • Do not install the unit near a doorway. The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed. Note: If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components. Volatile Organic Compounds Indoor Units (IDUs) should not be placed in an environment where the IDUs may be exposed to harmful volatile organic compounds (VOCs) or in environments where there is improper air make up or supply or inadequate ventilation. If there are concerns about VOCs in the environment where the IDUs are installed, proper air make up or supply and/ or adequate ventilation should be provided. Additionally, in buildings where IDUs will be exposed to VOCs consider a factory-applied epoxy coating to the fan coils for each IDU. Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure: • Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees). • Add insulation between the floor joists. • Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor. Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum: • Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches thick). • Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick). • Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the conditioned space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 147 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Figure 198:General and Duct Connection Dimensions. Figure 197:Clearance Requirements. Access Holes for Conduit >13-25/32 inches Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Access Holes for Conduit Refrigerant Piping Connections >23-5/8 Clearance from Access Panels for Service 0 (zero) inches 0 (zero) inches Drain Connections for Horizontal Install >13-25/32 inches Filter Access Drain Connections for Vertical Install Figure 199:Location of Access Holes and Piping Connections. Top Right Side Refrigerant Piping Connections Drain Connections for Vertical Install Drain Connections for Horizontal Install Air Filter Cover Bottom Front Table 89:General and Duct Connection Dimensions. Capacity (Btu/h) 24,000 36,000 148 Dimensions (inches) A Height B Width C Depth 48-21/32 18 21-1/4 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL D E 1-9/16 17-1/2 F G H 20 17 12-1/8 Access Hole for Wiring / Cable (inches) I J Power Comm. 1-11/16 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 7/8 Refrigerant Connection Sizes (inches) Liquid Vapor 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Units can be installed in a choice of vertical (upflow) or horizontal (left side) configurations. Vertical (Upflow) Installation Figure 200:Vertical Installation / Attaching the Bottom Duct. • Unit must be positioned properly for plenum / duct installation. Field Supplied Supply Air Duct • To maintain proper air flow, minimum height clearance is 14 inches. • Plenum must be strong and secure enough to support the installation of adapter collars to accommodate duct work. • Air handler platform should be sturdy enough to support the frame, plus any accessories (e.g., filter box). Field Supplied Return Air Duct / Plenum • Vibration isolators (field supplied) must be installed between the unit frame and the platform. If necessary, provide the installing contractor with an illustration of where the vibration isolator should be added and how it should be positioned. >1 inch Use > 6 Screws (M4*25L) Do not install the screws on the front and back of the unit, doing so may block filter installation. Horizontal Installation • Units must be installed so that the access panels face to the side, not facing up or down. Figure 201:Horizontal Installation. Field-Supplied Supply Air Duct >3/8 inch Threaded Rod Field Supplied Return Air Duct / Plenum • Installation must be in accordance with all relevant building codes, which may necessitate the installation of an external condensate pan (position the unit in or above the external condensate pan). • If the units are going to be suspended, use angled steel support brackets with threaded rods to provide support from the bottom. The brackets / threaded rods should be comparatively bigger / longer than the unit, and each must be centered on the part of the frame it supports. • If the unit will not be suspended, still use angled steel support brackets, but also add vibration isolators (field supplied) to avoid sound transmission. If necessary, provide the installing contractor with an illustration of where the vibration isolator should be added and how it should be positioned. >1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch Angle B Recommended length >26 inches with a 2-inch clearance on both sides of the unit C Suspension Bolt Locations Table 90:Bracket / Bolt Position Dimensions. Dimensions (inches) Capacity (Btu/h) A B 24,000 36,000 A 4 23 C 41-11/32 • Unit must be positioned properly for plenum / duct installation. • Plenum must be strong and secure enough to support the installation of adapter collars to accommodate duct work. To ensure proper drainage for horizontal installations, unit must be installed within ±1/8 inches level of the unit’s length and width. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 149 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling • To prevent air leaks, seal all duct work according to local codes, but make sure that filter access is still unobstructed. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Installing the Ducts Figure 202:Securing the Ducts to the Unit. • Use more than ten (10) screws to securely attach the supply ducts to the unit. To prevent air leaks, seal around the duct opening before the duct is secure. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual • To prevent vibration transmission, install flexible connectors between ducts and the unit. The flexible connectors must be made of a heat-resistant material at the discharge connection if an electric heater is installed. • Duct work must be insulated and covered with vapor barrier when routed through unconditioned spaces. Include enough insulation to prevent condensate from forming on the ducts. >10 Screws (M4*25L) • It may be necessary to add internal acoustical insulation lining for a metal duct system if it does not include a 90° elbow and ten (10) feet between the main duct and the first branch. • Fibrous glass ducts could be used as a substitute if built and installed in accordance with the most recent edition of the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors’ National Associate (SMACNA) standard. • Also, fibrous duct work and acoustical insulation lining must also follow National Fire Protection Standard 90A or B as tested by UL Standard 181 for Class 1 air ducts. Installing the Drain System General Specifications • To prevent property damage, optimize drain system performance by installing both a primary and secondary drain line, and properly size the condensate traps. • The primary and secondary drain line must be trapped to allow proper drainage of condensate water. If the secondary drain line is not used, it must be capped. • Do not block the filter access panel when installing the condensate drain piping. Prime the primary and secondary condensate traps after running both to the drain pan. • If the unit is installed above an inhabited space, add a field-supplied external condensate pan that runs underneath the entire frame (to prevent damage from overflow). The additional external condensate line should run from the unit to the external condensate pan. • Drain all generated condensate from the external condensate pan to an appropriate area. Install a trap in the condensate lines as near to the indoor unit coil as possible. • All condensate must be drained from the external condensate pan to some noticeable area. • To prevent overflow, the outlet of each trap should be positioned below its connection to the condensate pan. • All traps should be primed, insulated, and leak Figure 203:Vertical Installation Drain System. Figure 204:Horizontal Installation Drain System. tested if located above an inhabited space. • Use a 3/4-inch PVC male pipe thread fitting at the condensate pan connection. Tighten gently. • Point the drain hose down for easier flow. • Do not just use the pipe joint or PVC / CPVC piping on the indoor unit drain line connections. Use only Teflon tape. • Design the drain system to plan for winter operation (condensate line may freeze up if condensate does not properly drain away). Field-Supplied Drain Pan 150 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Drain Piping Field-Supplied Drain Pan Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Drain Piping MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Drain Piping Specifications • Drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down. • Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit when connecting the field-supplied drain piping. Figure 205:Close up of Drain Piping Connection. Drain Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Drain Piping (Field Supplied) Unit To prevent leaks cause by a block in the intake air filter, install a U-Trap. A ≥ 2-9/16 inches B ≥ 2C C ≥ 2 x SP SP = External Pressure in. WG Figure 206:Installing the U-Trap. Example: 3/4-inch Connector External Pressure= 0.4 in WG A ≥ 2-9/16 inches B ≥ 1-7/12 inches C ≥ 19/24 inches Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping B C U-Trap A Figure 207:Vertical Primary and Secondary Drain Layout. Figure 208:Horizontal Primary and Secondary Drain Layout. Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched. Refrigerant Piping Insulation Drain Access Hole Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit piping connections) and must comply with federal, state, and local requirements. Any exposed piping may generate condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F. If the indoor unit is installed and is operated at an extended period in a highly humid environment (dew point temperature >73°F), however, condensate will form. To prevent this phenomenon, install adiabatic glass wool insulation with a thickness of 7/16 to 13/16 inches thick. Also, install glass wool insulation on all indoor units that are located in the ceiling plenum. Air Filter Cover Supplementary Drain with a Proper Trap (Field Supplied Kit Can Be Used) Main Drain with Suitable Trap. (Field-Supplied Trap with Sufficient Depth Can Be Used. Standard Size P-Traps Cannot Be Used. Figure 210:Insulating the Refrigerant Piping and Refrigerant Piping Connections. Drain Piping Insulation Drain piping insulation must be 7/32 inches thick, minimum. Figure 209:Close Up of Refrigerant Piping Connection Insulation. Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Overlap Piping Insulation Insulation Clip (Field Supplied) Gaps Should Not be Present Connection for Liquid Piping Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Insulation Zip Tie (Field Supplied) Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Connection for Vapor Piping Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 151 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Drain Hole Gaps Should Not Be Present Field-Installed U-Trap Specifications MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices • • • • • • • Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals. Confirm power source specifications. Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient. Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate. Confirm cable thickness specifications. It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist. Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor. • Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death. Note: • Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation. A voltage drop may cause the following problems: • Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device. • Compressor will not receive the proper starting current. Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable Figure 211:Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable. 1. To access the terminal block, first unscrew the top front panel, and then unscrew the cover from the control box. 2. Knockout the access holes for the wiring. Insert the power wiring/ communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the conduits, pass the conduits through the designated access holes, and then insert the conduits into the control box. To prevent electromagnetic interference and product malfunction, leave a space between the power wiring and communications cable outside of the indoor unit. Top Front Panel Control Box Cover Access Holes for Wiring 3. Connect the power wiring and communications cables to the appropriate terminals on the indoor unit control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit. Nut Conduit Mounting Plate 4. Fill in any gaps around the conduit access holes with sealant to prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit. 1/2-inch Conduit Connection Cable Communications Cable Figure 212:Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX systems only) Power Wiring / Communications Cable Connections. Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) GND GND GRN / YLW RD 152 3 or S 3 BL 1(L1 ) 2 (L2) BR Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Controller Options AKB729558161 Wired Controller. Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling indoor units include an LG-supplied wired controller (AKB72955816)1, but other optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. The wireless handheld controller (Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB) is also an optional accessory with use of the wired controller. • • • • • Operation Display Panel Temperature Control Button Fan Speed Button Operation Display Panel: Displays operation conditions. Temperature Control Button: Sets desired temperature. Fan Speed Button: Sets desired fan speed. On / Off Button: Turns system operation on and off. Mode Selection Check Button: Selects the operation mode: Cooling, Heating, Auto, Dry (Dehumidification), or Fan. On/Off Button FA N SPEED TEMP OPER MODE Mode Selection Check Button Simple Mode Controllers for the vertical-horizontal air handling indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW. 1 Wired Controller Connections Controllers can connect to the indoor unit in one of two different ways. 1. LG Wired Remote Extension Cable with Molex plug (PZCWRC1; sold separately) that connects to the CN-REMO terminal on the indoor unit PCB. 2. Field-supplied controller cable that connects to the indoor unit terminal block (must be at least UL2547 or UL1007, 22 AWG, two-core, one-shield core, at least FT-6 rated if local electric and building codes require plenum cable usage). Figure 213:PZCWRC1 LG Wired Remote Extension Cable. Verify the connectors are properly inserted. C/BOX Cable (Plug type) FAN SPEED TEMP OPER MODE Extension cable To Indoor Unit CN-REMO Terminal Figure 214:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block. CN-REMO Indoor Unit Terminal Block 1(L1 ) 2 (L2) 3 GND controller to the indoor unit terminal blocks. 3 or S GND GRN / YLW RD BK 12V Power Ground BL RD BR YL Comm. Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or controller cable, make sure to connect When using field-supplied Branch Distribution UnittoTerminal Block the yellow yellow (communications wire), red to red (12V power (Multi F MAX wire),Systems and black Only) to black (ground wire) terminals from the remote Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 153 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Each function will display on the LED for about three (3) seconds when the power is first cycled on. MULTI F MULTI F MAX TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Wired Controller Placement Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature. • • • • • Do not install the wired controller near or in: Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners Hot or cold air from ducts Radiant heat from the sun or appliances Concealed pipes and chimneys An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall Hanging the Wired Controller 1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring / cable on applicable side. Figure 215:Proper Location for the Wired Controller. NO ot e Cont TEMP Remote Controlle r NO 4 to 5 feet above the floor TEMP Rem roller NO Figure 216:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves. Top Top Back 2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself. 3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides. YES TEMP Remote Controlle r Figure 217:Attaching the Wall Plate. 4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller. Do not damage the controller components when removing. Right Side Right Side Figure 218:Installing / Removing the Controller. Installing the Controller Wall Removing the Controller Wall Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection Wall Wall Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described. 154 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 155 FOUR-WAY VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL AIR HANDLING INDOOR UNIT DATA “Mechanical Specifications” on page 157 “General Data / Specifications” on page 157 “Dimensions” on page 158 “Cooling Capacity Table” on page 160 “Heating Capacity Table” on page 162 “External Static Pressure” on page 164 “Acoustic Data” on page 167 “Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 170 “Wiring Diagram” on page 171 “Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 173 “Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 174 MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Mechanical Specifications and Features Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air Handing Indoor Unit General All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling units are designed for high-speed air volume against an external static pressure up to 1.00″WG. Supply air opening is flanged to accept field-installed ductwork that cannot exceed the external static pressure limit of the unit. Coil Refrigerant System System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare, and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be field insulated. Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power with voltage variances of ±10%. Casing The casing is designed to mount fully concealed behind a wall or above a finished ceiling. Casing is manufactured of 22-gauge precoated metal and finished with a high-gloss baked enamel finish. Cold surfaces of the unit are covered internally with 1/2-inch polystyrene fiber insulation; inside surface of the pan assembly door access panel is treated with 1/2-inch polystyrene fiber insulation, encapsulated on both sides. The access panel is sealed along the edges with reinforced foil-faced covering, all access panels also have gasket seals to minimize air leaks. The vertical-horizontal air handling unit can operate in one of four airflow configurations: vertical upflow, vertical downflow, horizontal left discharge, or horizontal right discharge. Vertical downflow operation requires an optional conversion kit. In the vertical position, the unit has an opening for supply air from top (or bottom) with a dedicated bottom (or top) vertical return. In the horizontal position, supply air is from the left (or right) end with the return air from the right (or left) end. Unit can also accept an internal, optional LG electrical strip heater. • • • • Inverter (Variable speed fan) Control lock function Auto operation Dehumidifying function The units have an integral fan assembly consisting of galvanized steel housing and a forward curve fan wheel. The fan motor is a brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) motor with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on vibration-attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digital control algorithm. The indoor fan has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. Each of the settings can be field-adjusted from the factory setting (RPM / ESP). The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed to most effectively achieve setpoint. Filter Assembly Electrical Features Figure 219: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit. The unit comes with a filter rack sized to hold a field-provided 16” x 20” x 1” (NJ frame) or 24” x 20” x 1” (NK frame) filter cartridge. The filter rack has a guide to assist in centering the filters, and can be accessed from the front. Microprocessor Control The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided by temperature sensors within the indoor unit. A field-supplied communication cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit. Controls The indoor unit is supplied with an LG wired controller. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable. The indoor unit has a built-in dry contact for a field supplied 3rd party thermostat. An optional Wi-Fi module is available as an additional accessory for use with LG’s SmartThinQ app on a smart device. Condensate The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate. • • • • Two thermistor control Group control External static pressure control Self-diagnostics function • Wired thermostat included • Built-in dry contact for 3rd party thermostat Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 157 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has a minimum of two rows of coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil. Fan Assembly and Control MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS General Data / Specifications Table 91: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit General Data. Model Name LVN180HV4 LVN240HV4 LVN360HV4 18,000 24,000 36,000 20,000 27,000 40,000 57-77 57-77 57-77 59-81 59-81 59-81 Type Sircocco Sircocco Sircocco Motor Output (W) x Qty. 198 x 1 198 x 1 400 x 1 Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct 640 / 580 / 480 710 / 640 / 480 1,100 / 1,000 / 900 0.7 0.7 1.00 R410A R410A R410A EEV EEV EEV 208-230, 1, 60 208-230, 1, 60 208-230, 1, 60 1.1 1.1 2.2 42 / 42 / 41 43 / 42 / 41 45 / 44 / 43 18 x 48-11/16 x 21-1/4 18 x 48-11/16 x 21-1/4 25 x 55-3/16 x 21-1/4 129 129 165 140 140 188 4 x 18 4 x 18 4 x 18 (3x 24 x 18) x 2 (3x 24 x 18) x 2 (3x 30 x 18) x 2 Liquid (in.) 1/4 1/4 3/8 Vapor (in.) 1/2 1/2 5/8 Liquid (in.) 3/8 3/8 3/8 Vapor (in.) 5/8 5/8 5/8 Primary Drain I.D. (in.) 3/4 FPT 3/4 FPT 3/4 FPT Secondary Drain I.D. (in.) 3/4 FPT 3/4 FPT 3/4 FPT Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h) 1 Operating Range Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Cooling (°F WB) Heating (°F DB) Fan Motor/Drive Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) at 0.5" WG ESP Maximum External Static Pressure (in. WG) Unit Data Refrigerant Type2 Refrigerant Control Power Supply V, Ø, Hz 3 Rated Amps (A) Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L) at 0.3"WG ESP 4 Dimensions (W x H x D, in.) Net Weight (lbs.) Shipping Weight (lbs.) Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG) Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number 5 Pipe Size Connection Size Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 2 This unit comes with a dry helium charge. 1 158 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V. Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during operation. 5 All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs must be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 3 4 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Dimensions Figure 220: Four-way Vertical Air Handling Unit Dimensions. H G J I Top A Refrigerant connections Drain connections for horizontal right application Drain connections for horizontal left application D Drain connections for upflow application B Front C Side-right F Air filter cover Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit J E Bottom Wiring Knock out Dimensions ODU Capacity (kBtu/h) A B C D E F G Height Width Depth Multi Zone H I J Unit: inch Refrigerant Pipe size CommPower unication Liquid Refrigerant Pipe Connections Gas Liquid Gas 18 24 48-5/8 18 21-3/8 1-9/16 17-1/2 20 17 12-1/8 1-11/16 7/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 5/8 36 55-1/8 25 21-3/8 1-9/16 24-1/2 20 24 12-1/8 1-11/16 7/8 3/8 5/8 3/8 5/8 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 159 MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 92: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) LVN180HV4 18,000 LVN240HV4 24,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC 17.65 17.63 17.62 17.60 17.59 17.58 17.56 17.55 17.54 17.52 17.51 17.50 17.08 16.66 16.24 15.82 15.37 14.99 14.62 14.24 13.87 13.65 13.57 23.53 23.51 23.49 23.47 23.46 23.44 23.42 23.40 23.38 23.37 23.35 23.33 22.77 22.21 21.65 21.09 20.49 19.99 19.49 18.99 18.49 18.19 18.10 13.25 13.35 13.45 13.56 13.66 13.76 13.87 13.97 14.07 14.17 14.27 14.38 14.14 13.90 13.64 13.39 13.25 12.89 12.54 12.11 11.75 11.66 11.63 17.89 18.03 18.17 18.31 18.45 18.59 18.73 18.87 19.00 19.14 19.28 19.42 19.10 18.77 18.43 18.08 17.89 17.41 16.93 16.35 15.86 15.75 15.71 73 / 61 TC SHC 18.74 18.73 18.71 18.70 18.68 18.67 18.66 18.64 18.63 18.61 18.60 18.58 18.16 17.74 17.32 16.90 16.44 16.06 15.69 15.32 14.94 14.72 14.64 24.99 24.97 24.95 24.93 24.91 24.89 24.87 24.85 24.84 24.82 24.80 24.78 24.21 23.65 23.09 22.53 21.92 21.42 20.92 20.42 19.92 19.62 19.52 13.99 14.10 14.21 14.32 14.43 14.54 14.65 14.75 14.86 14.97 15.08 15.19 14.96 14.72 14.47 14.22 14.09 13.74 13.38 12.95 12.58 12.51 12.48 18.90 19.05 19.20 19.34 19.49 19.64 19.78 19.93 20.07 20.22 20.37 20.51 20.20 19.88 19.55 19.21 19.03 18.55 18.07 17.49 17.00 16.89 16.86 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 19.84 19.82 19.81 19.79 19.78 19.76 19.75 19.73 19.72 19.70 19.69 19.67 19.24 18.82 18.40 17.97 17.51 17.13 16.76 16.39 16.01 15.79 15.71 26.45 26.43 26.41 26.39 26.37 26.35 26.33 26.31 26.29 26.27 26.25 26.23 25.66 25.09 24.53 23.96 23.35 22.85 22.35 21.85 21.35 21.05 20.95 13.55 13.65 13.76 13.87 13.97 14.08 14.18 14.29 14.39 14.50 14.60 14.70 14.50 14.29 14.06 13.84 13.73 13.40 13.08 12.67 12.34 12.27 12.25 18.30 18.44 18.59 18.73 18.87 19.01 19.15 19.30 19.44 19.58 19.72 19.86 19.58 19.30 18.99 18.69 18.55 18.10 17.66 17.12 16.66 16.58 16.55 20.63 20.61 20.60 20.58 20.57 20.55 20.53 20.52 20.50 20.49 20.47 20.46 20.03 19.60 19.17 18.75 18.00 17.77 17.53 17.16 16.79 16.56 16.49 27.50 27.48 27.46 27.44 27.42 27.40 27.38 27.36 27.34 27.32 27.29 27.27 26.70 26.13 25.57 25.00 24.00 23.69 23.38 22.88 22.38 22.08 21.98 13.83 13.94 14.05 14.16 14.27 14.37 14.48 14.59 14.69 14.80 14.91 15.01 14.81 14.61 14.39 14.17 13.86 13.65 13.43 13.03 12.70 12.64 12.62 18.69 18.83 18.98 19.12 19.27 19.41 19.56 19.70 19.85 19.99 20.13 20.28 20.01 19.73 19.44 19.14 18.72 18.43 18.14 17.60 17.15 17.07 17.05 TC 86 / 72 SHC 22.03 22.01 22.00 21.98 21.96 21.94 21.93 21.91 21.89 21.88 21.86 21.84 21.41 20.98 20.55 20.12 19.65 19.28 18.90 18.53 18.15 17.93 17.85 29.37 29.35 29.33 29.30 29.28 29.26 29.24 29.21 29.19 29.17 29.15 29.13 28.55 27.97 27.40 26.83 26.20 25.70 25.20 24.70 24.20 23.90 23.81 13.95 14.06 14.17 14.28 14.39 14.49 14.60 14.71 14.82 14.93 15.03 15.14 14.96 14.77 14.57 14.36 14.29 13.98 13.67 13.29 12.97 12.92 12.91 18.84 18.99 19.14 19.28 19.43 19.58 19.72 19.87 20.01 20.16 20.30 20.45 20.20 19.95 19.68 19.40 19.30 18.88 18.47 17.94 17.51 17.46 17.44 TC 90 / 75 SHC 23.12 23.11 23.09 23.07 23.05 23.04 23.02 23.00 22.98 22.97 22.95 22.93 22.50 22.06 21.63 21.20 20.72 20.35 19.97 19.60 19.22 19.00 18.92 30.83 30.81 30.79 30.76 30.74 30.72 30.69 30.67 30.64 30.62 30.60 30.57 29.99 29.42 28.84 28.27 27.63 27.13 26.63 26.13 25.63 25.33 25.23 14.22 14.33 14.44 14.55 14.66 14.77 14.88 14.99 15.10 15.21 15.32 15.43 15.25 15.07 14.88 14.69 14.62 14.32 14.02 13.64 13.33 13.29 13.28 19.20 19.35 19.50 19.65 19.80 19.95 20.10 20.24 20.39 20.54 20.69 20.84 20.60 20.36 20.10 19.84 19.75 19.35 18.94 18.42 18.00 17.96 17.94 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. 160 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Cooling Capacity Table Table 91: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table - continued Model No. / Air Nominal Capacity Outdoor Temp. of Indoor Unit (°F DB) (Btu/h) 35.29 35.26 35.24 35.21 35.18 35.16 35.13 35.10 35.08 35.05 35.02 34.99 34.15 33.31 32.48 31.64 30.74 29.99 29.24 28.49 27.74 27.29 27.14 27.18 27.39 27.61 27.82 28.03 28.24 28.45 28.66 28.87 29.08 29.29 29.50 29.01 28.52 28.00 27.47 27.18 26.45 25.72 24.84 24.10 23.93 23.87 73 / 61 TC SHC 37.48 37.45 37.43 37.40 37.37 37.34 37.31 37.28 37.25 37.23 37.20 37.17 36.32 35.47 34.63 33.79 32.88 32.13 31.38 30.63 29.88 29.43 29.28 28.71 28.94 29.16 29.39 29.61 29.83 30.05 30.28 30.50 30.72 30.94 31.16 30.69 30.20 29.70 29.18 28.92 28.19 27.46 26.57 25.82 25.66 25.61 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB 77 / 64 80 / 67 TC SHC TC SHC 39.67 39.64 39.61 39.58 39.55 39.52 39.49 39.46 39.43 39.40 39.37 39.34 38.49 37.64 36.79 35.94 35.02 34.27 33.52 32.77 32.02 31.57 31.43 27.80 28.02 28.24 28.45 28.67 28.88 29.10 29.32 29.53 29.74 29.96 30.17 29.75 29.31 28.86 28.39 28.17 27.50 26.83 26.00 25.31 25.19 25.14 41.26 41.23 41.19 41.16 41.13 41.10 41.07 41.04 41.01 40.97 40.94 40.91 40.05 39.20 38.35 37.50 36.00 35.53 35.07 34.32 33.57 33.12 32.97 28.39 28.61 28.83 29.05 29.27 29.49 29.71 29.93 30.15 30.37 30.59 30.81 30.40 29.98 29.53 29.08 28.44 28.00 27.56 26.74 26.05 25.94 25.90 TC 86 / 72 SHC 44.06 44.02 43.99 43.96 43.92 43.89 43.86 43.82 43.79 43.76 43.72 43.69 42.82 41.96 41.10 40.25 39.30 38.55 37.80 37.05 36.31 35.86 35.71 28.63 28.85 29.07 29.30 29.52 29.74 29.96 30.19 30.41 30.63 30.85 31.07 30.69 30.30 29.89 29.48 29.32 28.69 28.06 27.26 26.61 26.52 26.49 TC 90 / 75 SHC 46.25 46.21 46.18 46.14 46.11 46.07 46.04 46.00 45.97 45.93 45.90 45.86 44.99 44.12 43.26 42.40 41.44 40.69 39.94 39.20 38.45 38.00 37.85 29.17 29.40 29.62 29.85 30.08 30.30 30.53 30.76 30.98 31.21 31.43 31.66 31.30 30.93 30.54 30.14 30.01 29.39 28.78 27.99 27.35 27.28 27.25 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 161 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit LVN360HV4 18,000 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 118 122 68 / 57 TC SHC MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 93: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LVN180HV4 18,000 LVN240HV4 24,000 Outdoor Air Temp. °F DB °F WB 0 -0.4 61 64 Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 72 75 TC TC TC TC TC TC 10.29 10.14 10.05 10.00 9.86 9.42 5 4.5 11.59 11.45 11.35 11.30 11.16 10.72 10 9 12.90 12.75 12.66 12.61 12.46 12.03 17 15 14.64 14.49 14.40 14.35 14.20 13.74 20 19 15.29 15.14 15.05 15.00 14.86 14.35 25 23 16.38 16.23 16.14 16.09 15.94 15.36 30 28 17.32 17.17 17.08 17.03 16.88 16.38 35 32 18.26 18.12 18.02 17.97 17.83 17.39 40 36 19.11 18.96 18.86 18.82 18.67 18.24 45 41 19.95 19.81 19.71 19.66 19.52 19.08 47 43 20.29 20.14 20.05 20.00 19.86 19.42 50 46 20.62 20.47 20.37 20.33 20.18 19.69 55 51 21.16 21.01 20.92 20.87 20.72 20.14 60 56 21.16 21.01 20.92 20.87 20.72 20.24 63 59 21.16 21.01 20.92 20.87 20.72 20.29 68 64 21.16 21.01 20.92 20.87 20.72 20.38 0 -0.4 13.89 13.70 13.57 13.50 13.30 12.72 5 4.5 15.65 15.46 15.33 15.26 15.07 14.48 10 9 17.41 17.22 17.09 17.02 16.83 16.24 17 15 19.76 19.57 19.43 19.37 19.17 18.55 20 19 20.64 20.45 20.32 20.25 20.05 19.37 25 23 22.11 21.91 21.78 21.72 21.52 20.74 30 28 23.38 23.18 23.05 22.99 22.79 22.11 35 32 24.65 24.46 24.33 24.26 24.07 23.48 40 36 25.79 25.60 25.47 25.40 25.21 24.62 45 41 26.93 26.74 26.61 26.54 26.35 25.76 47 43 27.39 27.20 27.07 27.00 26.80 26.22 50 46 27.83 27.64 27.51 27.44 27.24 26.58 55 51 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.20 60 56 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.32 63 59 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.39 68 64 28.57 28.37 28.24 28.17 27.98 27.51 TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). 162 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Heating Capacity Table Table 92: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table - continued Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) 64 TC Indoor Air Temp. °F DB 68 70 TC TC °F DB °F WB 61 TC 72 TC 75 TC 0 -0.4 20.58 20.29 20.10 5 4.5 23.19 22.90 22.71 20.00 19.71 18.84 22.61 22.32 10 9 25.80 25.51 21.45 25.31 25.22 24.93 17 15 29.28 24.06 28.99 28.79 28.70 28.41 20 19 27.48 30.58 30.29 30.10 30.00 29.71 25 28.70 23 32.75 32.46 32.27 32.17 31.88 30.72 30 28 34.64 34.35 34.15 34.06 33.77 32.75 35 32 36.52 36.23 36.04 35.94 35.65 34.78 40 36 38.21 37.92 37.73 37.63 37.34 36.47 45 41 39.90 39.61 39.42 39.32 39.03 38.16 47 43 40.58 40.29 40.10 40.00 39.71 38.84 50 46 41.23 40.94 40.75 40.65 40.36 39.38 55 51 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.29 60 56 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.47 63 59 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.58 68 64 42.32 42.03 41.84 41.74 41.45 40.76 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit LVN360HV4 36,000 Outdoor Air Temp. TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h). Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit. Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 163 FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS External Static Pressure and Airflow Ranges Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 221: ESP Setting Values – NJ Chassis, LVN180HV4, LVN240HV4 Figure 222: ESP Setting Values – NK Chassis, LVN360HV4. 164 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS External Static Pressure Table 94: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit External Static Pressure Setting Values Table. Static Pressure (in. wg) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 Model No. / Nominal Capacity Airflow Rate / CFM of Indoor Unit (Btu/h) LVN240HV4 24,000 LVN360HV4 36,000 640 580 480 710 640 480 1,100 1,000 900 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 95 93 91 97 95 91 102 100 98 — — — — — — 106 104 102 — — — — — — 112 110 108 — — — — — — — 116 114 Setting Value at (in. wg)1 63 57 51 67 63 51 65 61 57 67 63 59 71 67 59 71 67 63 75 69 65 79 75 65 79 75 71 81 77 73 85 81 73 86 82 78 88 84 80 92 88 80 92 88 84 91 89 87 94 91 87 96 94 92 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit High Mid Low High Mid Low High Mid Low LVN180HV4 18,000 0.5 Unless otherwise noted, vertical-horizontal air handing units are UL listed up to 0.5 in. wg total static pressure, including coil, case, duct work pressure drop, air filter, and largest kW size heater. Internal static pressure includes coil and case only. 2 Airflow rate (CFM) decreases by 3% per 0.1 in. wg. 3 Factory default setting is 0.3 in wg 4 Factory default setting is high static pressure 1 Note: • If the ESP is set incorrectly, the air conditioning may malfunction. • To get the desired air flow and external static pressure combination, use the setting value from the table. Using a setting value other than the values listed in the table will not provide the desired combination. Table 95: Air Filter Static Pressure Drop Factors. Capacity (kBtu/h [tons]) 18 (1.5) 24 (2.0) 36 (3.0) Flow Rate (CFM) Static Pressure Drop (in wg) High (640) Middle(580) Low (480) High (710) Middle(640) Low (480) High (1100) Middle(1000) Low (900) -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.08 -0.08 -0.08 Table 96: Minimum Airflow (CFM) by Heater Capacity Capacity (kBtu/h [tons]) Heater Capacity kW 3, 5 8, 10 15 20 18 (1.5) 480 480 Not Available Not Available 24 (2.0) 480 480 Not Available Not Available 36 (3.0) 900 900 900 900 Do not operate with less than the minimum airflow. If an airflow is used below the minimum, there is a risk of fire, which may lead to physical injury or death Note: Do not operate with less than the minimum airflow. If an airflow is used below the minimum, there is a risk of damage to the product. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 165 FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS External Static Pressure MULTI F MULTI F MAX Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Table 97: Electric Heater Static Pressure Drop Factors. Heater Capacity Static Pressure Drop (in. wg) 0 0 3, 5 -0.01 8, 10 -0.02 15 -0.03 20 -0.04 If the electric heater optional accessory is installed, adjust ESP value according to heater size For every increase in static pressure by 0.01 in wg, the ESP value must be increased by 1 If the ESP setting value is inappropriate, the provided safety device will turn the heater off according to the airflow Table 98: Down Flow (optional) Static Pressure Drop Factors. Capacity (kBtu/h [tons]) 18 (1.5) 24 (2.0) 36 (3.0) Flow Rate (CFM) Static Pressure Drop (in wg) High (640) Middle(580) Low (480) High (710) Middle(640) Low (480) High (1100) Middle(1000) Low (900) -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.09 -0.09 -0.09 Flow Rate (CFM) Static Pressure Drop (in wg) High (640) Middle(580) Low (480) High (710) Middle(640) Low (480) High (1100) Middle(1000) Low (900) -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.04 -0.06 -0.06 -0.06 If the optional down flow kit is installed, adjust ESP value as necessary For every increase in static pressure by 0.01 in wg, the ESP value must be increased by 1 Table 99: Down Flow Air Filter Static Pressure Drop Factors Capacity (kBtu/h [tons]) 18 (1.5) 24 (2.0) 36 (3.0) If the air filter is installed, adjust ESP value as necessary For every increase in static pressure by 0.01 in wg, the ESP value must be increased by 1 Table 100: Down Flow Internal Electric Heater Static Pressure Drop. Heater Capacity (kW) 0 3, 5 8, 10 15 20 Static Pressure Drop (in. wg) 0 -0.01 -0.01 -0.01 -0.01 If the electric heater optional accessory is installed, adjust ESP value according to heater size For every increase in static pressure by 0.01 in wg, the ESP value must be increased by 1 If the ESP setting value is inappropriate, the provided safety device will turn the heater off according to the airflow 166 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Acoustic Data Table 101: Optional Electric Heater Capacites. Heater Capacity (kW) 3 5 8 10 15 20 Static Pressure Drop (in. wg) ANEH033B1 ANEH053B1 ANEH083B2 ANEH103B2 ANEH153B2 ANEH203B2 Figure 223: Typical Vertical Air Handling Unit Optional Electric Heater Accessory. Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Example: 5kW Capacity Heater Bracket Bi metal Heater Coil Terminal Block Relay Heater Cable Appearance may vary depending on model capacity. Table 102: Electric Heater Compatibility VAHU Model Number and Capacity (MBh) Model Number / Heater Capacity kW ANEH033B1 (3kW) ANEH053B1 (5kW) ANEH083B2 (8kW) ANEH103B2 (10kW) ANEH153B2 (15kW) ANEH203B2 (20kW) LVN180HV4 (18) √ √ √ √ X X LVN240HV4 (24) √ √ √ √ X X LVN360HV4 (36) √ √ √ √ √ √ √ = Compatible X = Not Compatible Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 167 FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Acoustic Data MULTI F MULTI F MAX Figure 224: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. Microphone • Measurement taken 3.3′ away from the unit. • Sound pressure levels are measured in dB(A) with a tolerance of ±3. • Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745. • Operating Conditions: Power source: 220V/60 Hz. • Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors including the construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of a particular room in which the unit was installed. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual 3.3 ft. With Case 3.3 ft. Table 103: Vertical Air Handling Unit Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]). Model No. LVN180HV4 LVN240HV4 LVN360HV4 Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating) High Fan Speed Medium Fan Speed Low Fan Speed 42 43 45 42 42 44 41 41 43 Figure 225: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams. LVN180HV4 168 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL LVN240HV4 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. LVN360HV4 MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Acoustic Data Table 104: Vertical Air Handling Unit Sound Power Levels (dB[A]). Model No. LVN180HV4 LVN240HV4 LVN360HV4 Sound Power Levels (dB[A]) High Fan Speed 59 60 61 Figure 226: Sound Power Level Diagrams. LVN240HV4 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. LVN360HV4 VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit LVN180HV4 • Data is valid under diffuse field conditions. • Data is valid under nominal operating conditions. • Sound power level is measured using rated conditions, and tested in a reverberation room per ISO 3741 standards. • Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is installed. • Reference acoustic intensity: 0dB = 10E-6μW/m2 | 169 MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Refrigerant Flow Diagram Figure 227: Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram. Scirocco Fan Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual M Vapor Pipe Connection Port Heat Exchanger (Flare Connection) Heating Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor Cooling Ev. Temperature Thermistor Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor Liquid Pipe Connection Port (Flare Connection) Table 105: Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Sizes and Connection Sizes. Model No. Piping Size Connection Port Size Liquid (inch) Vapor (inch) Liquid (inch) Vapor (inch) LVN180HV4 1/4 1/2 3/8 5/8 LVN240HV4 1/4 1/2 3/8 5/8 LVN360HV4 3/8 5/8 3/8 5/8 Table 106: Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air-Handling Indoor Unit Thermistor Details. 170 Description (Based on Cooling Mode) PCB Connector Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor CN-ROOM Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/IN Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor CN-PIPE/OUT | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Figure 228: Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air-Handling Indoor Unit Wiring Diagram. Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 171 MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Wiring Diagram Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Table 107: Wiring Diagram Connections. Connection Name Location Function CN-POWER AC power supply AC Power line CN-MOTOR1 Fan motor output Motor output of BLDC CN_OUT Heater Connection for heater CN-D/PUMP Drain pump output AC output for drain pump CN-FLOAT Float switch input Float switch sensing CN-ZONE Zone controller Zone controller connection CN-OPTION Optional PCB EPROM Option PCB connection CN-EXT External ON / OFF controller External ON / OFF controller connection CN-DISPLAY Display Display of indoor status CN-CC Dry contact Dry Contact connection CN-PIPE/OUT (RD) Discharge pipe sensor Pipe out thermistor CN-LEAK (VI) Refrigerant leak detector Refrigerant leak detector connection CN-PIPE/IN (WH) Suction pipe sensor Pipe in thermistor CN-REMO (GN) Wired remote controller Wired remote control connection CN-ROOM (YL) Room sensor Room air thermistor CN-DAMPER Damper Controller Damper connection CN-AIRC Air Cleaner Air Cleaner connection CN-WF Wifi Wifi Module connection Table 108: DIP Switch Settings. Dip Switch Settings OFF ON Description Communication Off (default) — — SW2 CYCLE Off (default) — SW3 GROUP Master Slave Group control setting using wired remote controller. Dry contact mode setting. 1. Variable: Auto/manual mode can be chosen using the wide wired remote controller or wireless remote controller (factory setting is the manual mode). 2. Auto: For dry contact, it is always auto mode. SW1 — SW4 DRY CONTACT Variable Auto SW5 EXTRA1 Off On • ON: Fan operates continuously. • OFF: Default (Fan does not operate continuously). SW6 HEATER Off On • ON: Automatic heater operation. • OFF: Default (manual heater operation). SW7 Off SW8 Off To operate the indoor unit without Internal Electric Heater , Dip switch 1, 2, 6, 8 must be set OFF . To operate the indoor unit with Internal Electric heater , Dip switch 6 must be set ON. • SW6 ON: Automatic Heater operation: Heater operates automatically. • SW6 OFF: Manual Heater operation: Owner ’s involvement is required for on/off operation. If you operate the indoor unit with Internal Electric heater with Dip switch 5, note the following: • SW5 ON: Fan operates continuously. During defrosting or oil return operation, uninterrupted heating can be attained, as a result of continuous heater and fan operation. • SW5 OFF: Fan discontinuous operation. There would be a reduction in heating capacity while defrosting or oil return operation. 172 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Factory Supplied Parts and Materials Factory Supplied Materials • Owner’s Manual • Installation Manual • Simple Controller with Mode Selection (AKB72955816)1 Simple Mode Controllers for the vertical-horizontal air handling indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW. 1 Required Tools • • • • • Level Screwdriver Electric drill Hole core drill Flaring tool set • • • • Torque wrenches Hexagonal wrench Gas-leak detector Thermometer WARNING Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death. Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation. Selecting the Best Location Do’s • Place the unit where air circulation through the ducts will not be blocked. • Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily. • Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration. • Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor unit. • Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space. • Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit. Don’ts • Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used. • Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored. • Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators. • Do not install the unit near a doorway. The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed. Note: If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components. Volatile Organic Compounds Indoor Units (IDUs) should not be placed in an environment where the IDUs may be exposed to harmful volatile organic compounds (VOCs) or in environments where there is improper air make up or supply or inadequate ventilation. If there are concerns about VOCs in the environment where the IDUs are installed, proper air make up or supply and/or adequate ventilation should be provided. Additionally, in buildings where IDUs will be exposed to VOCs consider a factory-applied epoxy coating to the fan coils for each IDU. Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure: • Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees). • Add insulation between the floor joists. • Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor. Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum: • Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches thick). • Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick). • Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the conditioned space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 173 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Note: MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Figure 230:General and Duct Connection Dimensions. Figure 229:Clearance Requirements. Access Holes for Conduit More than 13-25/32 Refrigerant Piping Connections More than 23-5/8 clearance from access panels for Service Unit : inch 0 (zero) 0 (zero) Drain Connections for Horizontal Install More than 13-25/32 Filter Access Figure 231:Location of Access Holes and Piping Connections. Drain Connections for Vertical Install H G J I Top Refrigerant connections A J Drain connections for horizontal right application Drain connections for horizontal left application Drain connections for upflow application D B Front Air filter cover C Side-right F Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Access Holes for Conduit Unit: inch E Bottom Wiring Knock out Dimensions ODU VAHU Capacity (kBtu/h) Multi Zone 174 A B C Height Width Depth D E F G H I J Refrigerant Pipe size CommPower unication Liquid Refrigerant Pipe Connections Gas Liquid Gas 18 24 48-5/8 18 21-3/8 1-9/16 17-1/2 20 17 12-1/8 1-11/16 7/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 5/8 36 55-1/8 25 21-3/8 1-9/16 24-1/2 20 24 12-1/8 1-11/16 7/8 3/8 5/8 3/8 5/8 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Do not install the screws on the front and back of the unit; doing so may block filter installation. >1 inch Vertical (Downflow) Installation The Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit can be field-converted to vertical downflow operation. The Use > 6 Screws (M4*25L) optional vertical downflow kit is required. Downflow kit PNDFJ0 is required for 18-24MBH NJ chassis units and downflow kit PNDFK0 is required for 36MBH NK chassis units. The coil must be removed and repositioned in the chassis with the brackets of the downflow kit. For installation details, refer to the instructions included with the kit. Figure 233: Chassis after Downflow Field Conversion. Air filter cover Refrigerant connections Drain connections for downflow application Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 175 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Units can be installed in a choice of vertical upflow, vertical downflow (with optional downflow kit), or horizontal (left or right side) configurations. Figure 232:Vertical Installation / Vertical (Upflow) Installation Attaching the Bottom Duct. • Unit must be positioned properly for plenum / duct installation. Field Supplied • To maintain proper air flow, minimum height clearance is 14 inches. Supply Air Duct • Plenum must be strong and secure enough to support the installation of adapter collars to accommodate duct work. • Air handler platform should be sturdy enough to support the frame, plus any accessories (e.g., filter box). • To prevent air leaks, seal all duct work according to local codes, but make sure that filter access is still Field Supplied Return Air Duct / Plenum unobstructed. • Vibration isolators (field supplied) must be installed between the unit frame and the platform. If necessary, provide the installing contractor with an illustration of where the vibration isolator should be added and how it should be positioned. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Horizontal Installation • Units may be installed in horizontal left or horizontal right configuration. Horizontal left is the factory default configuration. For horizontal right, the unit must be field converted. The horizontal right conversion requires removing the internal drain pan from the left side of the unit and reinstalling on the right side. No conversion kit is required. Refer to the installation manual for details. • Units must be installed so that the access panels face to the side, not facing up or down. • Installation must be in accordance with all relevant building codes, which may necessitate the installation of an external condensate pan (position the unit in or above the external condensate pan). • If the units are going to be suspended, use angled steel support brackets with threaded rods to provide support from the bottom. The brackets / threaded rods should be comparatively bigger / longer than the unit, and each must be centered on the part of the frame it supports. • If the unit will not be suspended, use angled steel support brackets, but also add vibration isolators (field supplied) to avoid sound transmission. If necessary, provide the installing contractor with an illustration of where the vibration isolator should be added and how it should be positioned. • Unit must be positioned properly for plenum / duct installation. • Plenum must be strong and secure enough to support the installation of adapter collars to accommodate duct work. Figure 234: Typical Horizontal Left Installation. Field-Supplied Supply Air Duct Field Supplied Return Air Duct / Plenum >3/8 inch Threaded Rod >1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch Angle A B Recommended length >26 inches with a 2-inch clearance on both sides of the unit C Suspension Bolt Locations Figure 235: Typical Horizontal Right Installation. Field Supplied Return Air Duct / Plenum To ensure proper drainage for horizontal installations, unit must be installed within ±1/8 inches level of the unit’s length and width. Field-Supplied Supply Air Duct >3/8 inch Threaded Rod >1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch Angle A Recommended length >26 inches with a 2-inch clearance on both sides of the unit B C Suspension Bolt Locations Table 109: Bracket / Bolt Position Dimensions for Horizontal Left and Horizontal Right Installation. Capacity (Btu/h) 18,000 24,000 36,000 176 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL A 4 4 4 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Dimensions (inches) B 23 23 29 C 41-11/32 41-11/32 48 MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Installing the Ducts Figure 236:Securing the Ducts to the Unit. • Use more than ten (10) screws to securely attach the supply ducts to the unit. To prevent air leaks, seal around the duct opening before the duct is secure. • To prevent vibration transmission, install flexible connectors between ducts and the unit. The flexible connectors must be made of a heat-resistant material at the discharge connection if an electric heater is installed. • Duct work must be insulated and covered with vapor barrier when routed through unconditioned spaces. Include enough insulation to prevent condensate from forming on the ducts. • Fibrous glass ducts could be used as a substitute if built and installed in accordance with the most recent edition of the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors’ National Associate (SMACNA) standard. • Also, fibrous duct work and acoustical insulation lining must also follow National Fire Protection Standard 90A or B as tested by UL Standard 181 for Class 1 air ducts. Installing the Drain System General Specifications • To prevent property damage, optimize drain system performance by installing both a primary and secondary drain line, and properly size the condensate traps. • The primary and secondary drain line must be trapped to allow proper drainage of condensate water. If the secondary drain line is not used, it must be capped. • Do not block the filter access panel when installing the condensate drain piping. Prime the primary and secondary condensate traps after running both to the drain pan. • If the unit is installed above an inhabited space, add a field-supplied external condensate pan that runs underneath the entire frame (to prevent damage from overflow). The additional external condensate line should run from the unit to the external condensate pan. • Drain all generated condensate from the external condensate pan to an appropriate area. Install a trap in the condensate lines as near to the indoor unit coil as possible. • For horizontal right operation, the drain pan must be removed from the interior left side of the unit and reinstalled on the right side. • All condensate must be drained from the external condensate pan to some noticeable area. Figure 237: Typical Vertical Up/Down Installation Drain System. Figure 238: Typical Horizontal Left/Right Installation Drain System. • To prevent overflow, the outlet of each trap should be positioned below its connection to the condensate pan. • All traps should be primed, insulated, and leak tested if located above an inhabited space. • Use a 3/4-inch PVC male pipe thread fitting at the condensate pan connection. Tighten gently. • Point the drain hose down for easier flow. • Do not just use the pipe joint or PVC / CPVC piping on the indoor unit drain line connections. Use only Teflon tape. • Design the drain system to plan for winter operation (condensate line may freeze up if condensate does not properly drain away). Field-Supplied Drain Pan Drain Piping Field-Supplied Drain Pan Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Drain Piping VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 177 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit >10 Screws (M4*25L) • It may be necessary to add internal acoustical insulation lining for a metal duct system if it does not include a 90° elbow and ten (10) feet between the main duct and the first branch. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Drain Piping Specifications • Drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down. • Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit when connecting the field-supplied drain piping. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Figure 239:Close up of Drain Piping Connection. Drain Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Drain Piping (Field Supplied) Unit Drain Hole Gaps Should Not Be Present Field-Installed U-Trap Specifications To prevent leaks cause by a block in the intake air filter, install a U-Trap. A ≥ 2-9/16 inches B ≥ 2C C ≥ 2 x SP SP = External Pressure in. WG Figure 240:Installing the U-Trap. Example: 3/4-inch Connector External Pressure= 0.4 in WG A ≥ 2-9/16 inches B ≥ 1-7/12 inches C ≥ 19/24 inches Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping B C U-Trap A Figure 241: Vertical Primary and Secondary Drain Layout. Figure 242: Horizontal Primary and Secondary Drain Layout. Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched. Refrigerant Piping Insulation Drain Access Hole Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit piping connections) and must comply with federal, state, and local requirements. Any exposed piping may generate condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F. If the indoor unit is installed and is operated at an extended period in a highly humid environment (dew point temperature >73°F), however, condensate will form. To prevent this phenomenon, install adiabatic glass wool insulation with a thickness of 7/16 to 13/16 inches thick. Also, install glass wool insulation on all indoor units that are located in the ceiling plenum. Air Filter Cover Supplementary Drain with a Proper Trap (Field Supplied Kit Can Be Used) Main Drain with Suitable Trap. (Field-Supplied Trap with Sufficient Depth Can Be Used. Standard Size P-Traps Cannot Be Used. Figure 244: Insulating the Refrigerant Piping and Refrigerant Piping Connections. Drain Piping Insulation Drain piping insulation must be 7/32 inches thick, minimum. Figure 243:Close Up of Refrigerant Piping Connection Insulation. Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Overlap Piping Insulation Insulation Clip (Field Supplied) Gaps Should Not be Present 178 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Connection for Liquid Piping Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Insulation Zip Tie (Field Supplied) Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied) Connection for Vapor Piping Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines • • • • • • • Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals. Confirm power source specifications. Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient. Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate. Confirm cable thickness specifications. It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist. Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor. • Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death. • Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation. A voltage drop may cause the following problems: • Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device. • Compressor will not receive the proper starting current. Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable Figure 245:Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable. 1. To access the terminal block, first unscrew the top front panel, and then unscrew the cover from the control box. 2. Knockout the access holes for the wiring. Insert the power wiring/ communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the conduits, pass the conduits through the designated access holes, and then insert the conduits into the control box. To prevent electromagnetic interference and product malfunction, leave a space between the power wiring and communications cable outside of the indoor unit. Top Front Panel Control Box Cover Access Holes for Wiring 3. Connect the power wiring and communications cables to the appropriate terminals on the indoor unit control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit. Nut Conduit Mounting Plate 4. Fill in any gaps around the conduit access holes with sealant to prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit. 1/2-inch Conduit Connection Cable Communications Cable Figure 246:Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX systems only) Power Wiring / Communications Cable Connections. Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block (Multi F MAX Systems Only) GND 3 or S 3 GND GRN / YLW RD BL BR 1(L1 ) 2 (L2) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 179 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Note: MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Controller Options AKB729558161 Wired Controller. • • • • • Operation Display Panel Temperature Control Button Fan Speed Button Operation Display Panel: Displays operation conditions. Temperature Control Button: Sets desired temperature. Fan Speed Button: Sets desired fan speed. On / Off Button: Turns system operation on and off. Mode Selection Check Button: Selects the operation mode: Cooling, Heating, Auto, Dry (Dehumidification), or Fan. On/Off Button FA N SPEED TEMP OPER MODE Mode Selection Check Button Simple Mode Controllers for the vertical-horizontal air handling indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW. 1 Each function will display on the LED for about three (3) seconds when the power is first cycled on. Wired Controller Connections Controllers can connect to the indoor unit in one of two different ways. 1. LG Wired Remote Extension Cable with Molex plug (PZCWRC1; sold separately) that connects to the CN-REMO terminal on the indoor unit PCB. 2. Field-supplied controller cable that connects to the indoor unit terminal block (must be at least UL2547 or UL1007, 22 AWG, two-core, one-shield core, at least FT-6 rated if local electric and building codes require plenum cable usage). Figure 247:PZCWRC1 LG Wired Remote Extension Cable. Verify the connectors are properly inserted. C/BOX Cable (Plug type) FAN SPEED TEMP OPER MODE Extension cable To Indoor Unit CN-REMO Terminal Figure 248:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block. CN-REMO Indoor Unit Terminal Block BK 12V Power Ground 1(L1 ) 2 (L2) 3 RD 180 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL GND Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or controller cable, make sure to connect When using field-supplied Branch Distribution UnittoTerminal Block the yellow yellow (communications wire), red to red (12V power (Multi F MAX wire),Systems and black Only) to black (ground wire) terminals from the remote controller to the indoor unit terminal blocks. 3 or S GND GRN / YLW RD BL YL Comm. BR Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling indoor units include an LG-supplied wired controller (AKB72955816)1, but other optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. The wireless handheld controller (Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB) is also an optional accessory with use of the wired controller. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS Installation and Best Layout Practices Wired Controller Placement Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature. Hanging the Wired Controller 1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring / cable on applicable side. NO ot e Cont TEMP Remote Controlle r NO 4 to 5 feet above the floor TEMP Rem roller NO Figure 250:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves. Top Top Back 2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself. 3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides. YES TEMP Remote Controlle r Figure 251:Attaching the Wall Plate. 4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller. Do not damage the controller components when removing. Right Side Right Side Figure 252:Installing / Removing the Controller. Installing the Controller Wall Wall Removing the Controller Wall Wall Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL | 181 Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit • • • • • Do not install the wired controller near or in: Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners Hot or cold air from ducts Radiant heat from the sun or appliances Concealed pipes and chimneys An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall Figure 249:Proper Location for the Wired Controller. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual MULTI F MULTI F MAX 182 | VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. APPLICATION GUIDELINES “Equipment Selection Procedure” on page 184 “Placement Considerations” on page 191 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE MULTI F MULTI F MAX To choose the multi-zone system that is the most appropriate for the space, as with traditional air-conditioning systems, follow similar protocols outlined in Manual J from the Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA; see www.acca.org). 1. Obtain the design conditions, and calculate the maximum cool and heat loads for the structure. 2. Select the equipment (choosing the appropriate indoor units and outdoor unit): • Determine number of zones. • Determine total number of indoor units (refer to zone load calculations when choosing indoor units). • Determine number of indoor units allocated to each outdoor unit, considering allowable indoor unit connections, both indoor unit and outdoor unit capacities, and system piping capabilities. 3. Determine the corrected capacity for the indoor units and outdoor unit using LATS Multi F software (preferred method) or: • System Combination Tables. • Capacity Tables (it may be necessary to interpolate). • Capacity Coefficient Factors (such as refrigerant line length derates, design condition derates, defrost operation derate [heating mode], altitude derate [if applicable]). 4. Compare corrected capacities to load calculations. 5. Reselect equipment if necessary. Obtain Design Conditions, Calculate Maximum Cool / Heat Loads Obtain the winter outdoor / indoor temperature and summer and winter outdoor / indoor temperature design parameters for the location in which the system is installed. Determine if summer or winter design gains, relative humidity, and building features like skylights, orientation, number of occupants, etc., would change the total heat loss / gain and sensible / latent heat gain, and then calculate the maximum cool and heat loads for the space (using Manual J or energy modeling programs). Select the Equipment Determine the Number of Zones Multi F and Multi F with LG RED heat pump systems can cool or heat, but not simultaneously. When designing larger-capacity Multi F heat pump systems or a Multi F MAX system, the designer may be able to combine spaces with similar load profiles located near or adjacent to each other into “thermal zones.” After combining like spaces into zones that will be served by a single (or grouped) indoor unit(s), calculate the peak cooling and heating loads for each zone. Choosing the Appropriate Indoor Units Determine the appropriate indoor unit capacity that satisfies the given zone load calculations, and choose how many (and which styles of) indoor units will be required. See Table 90 for allowable indoor unit to outdoor unit connections, and the maximum number of connectable indoor units on each Multi F and Multi F MAX outdoor unit. When choosing indoor units, also consider the cooling and heating CFM, featured airflow specifications, and static pressure (if applicable) for each indoor unit. Avoid oversizing indoor units in an attempt to increase the air exchange rate in the space. Multi F and Multi F MAX systems are designed for minimum airflow over the coil to maximize latent capacity while cooling, maintain a comfortable, consistent discharge air temperature while heating, and minimize fan motor power consumption. In extreme cases, oversizing the indoor units may affect outdoor unit size selection and compromise the outdoor unit’s ability to effectively match the space load(s). For proper system operation: 1. At least two indoor units must be connected to the outdoor unit. 2. Total connected indoor unit nominal capacity should be a minimum 40% and a maximum of 133% of outdoor unit nominal capacity. 3. To calculate the connected total indoor unit nominal capacity, simply sum up the nominal capacities of all indoor units. • For high static duct and vertical-horizontal air handling indoor units, a 1.3 multiplier must first be applied before adding to the sum of other indoor units. • When high static duct and / or vertical-horizontal air handling indoor units are the only connected indoor units, the multiplier is 1.2. For allocated capacity information, see the combination tables in the "Multi F / Multi F MAX Combination Data Manual" on www.lg-dfs.com. For performance data, see "Multi F / Multi F MAX Performance Data Manual" on on www.lg-dfs.com. Also refer to the appropriate manuals on www. lg-dfs.com for combination and capacity data for Multi F with LG RED / Multi F MAX with LG RED units. 184 | APPLICATION GUIDELINES Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE Multiplier Examples Example 1 Outdoor Unit: LMU540HV First Indoor Unit: + Second Indoor Unit: + Third Indoor Unit: LMCN125HV LSN090HSV4 LVN360HV4 Total Capacity Index = 12 + 9 Branch Distribution Unit (PMBD3620) Example 2 Branch Distribution Unit (PMBD3641) + 36 x 1.3 = 67.8 < 73 Acceptable Combination Outdoor Unit: LMU540HV Total Capacity Index = First Indoor Unit: + Second Indoor Unit: LVN240HV4 LVN240HV4 24 x 1.2 + 24 x 1.2 = 57.6 < 73 Acceptable Combination Table 110: Allowable Indoor Unit to Multi F/ Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit Connections. Indoor units ART COOL Mirror ART COOL Gallery Standard Wall Mounted Ceiling Concealed DuctLow Static Ceiling Concealed DuctHigh Static Four-Way Ceiling Cassette Vertical-Horizontal Air Handler Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. APPLICATION GUIDELINES | 185 Application Guidelines Model Type Outdoor units LMU18CHV LMU24CHV LMU30CHV LMU36CHV LMU480HV LMU540HV LMU600HV Indoor Unit Nominal Maximum No. of Connectable Indoor Units Capacity (Btu/h) 2 3 4 4 8 8 8 9,000 O O O O O O O 12,000 O O O O O O O 18,000 O O O O O O 9,000 O O O O O O O 12,000 O O O O O O O 7,000 O O O O O O O 9,000 O O O O O O O 12,000 O O O O O O O 15,000 O O O O O O O 18,000 O O O O O O 24,000 O O O O O O 9,000 O O O O O O O 12,000 O O O O O O O 18,000 O O O O O O 24,000 O O O O O 36,000 O O O 7,000 O O O O O O O 9,000 O O O O O O O 12,000 O O O O O O O 18,000 O O O O O O 18,000 O O O O O O 24,000 O O O O O 36,000 O O O MULTI F MULTI F MAX EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE Table 112: Allowable Indoor Unit to Multi F/ Multi F MAX with LGRED Outdoor Unit Connections. Indoor units Model Type Indoor Unit Nominal Capacity (Btu/h) Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual ART COOL Mirror ART COOL Gallery Standard Wall Mounted Ceiling Concealed DuctLow Static Ceiling Concealed DuctHigh Static Four-Way Ceiling Cassette Vertical-Horizontal Air Handler LMU180HHV 2 O O O O O O O O O O O O O - 9,000 12,000 18,000 9,000 12,000 7,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000 24,000 9,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 36,000 7,000 9,000 12,000 18,000 18,000 24,000 36,000 Outdoor units LMU240HHV LMU300HHV LMU360HHV Maximum No. of Connectable Indoor Units 3 4 5 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O - LMU420HHV 6 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Choosing the Appropriate Outdoor Unit After all indoor units are properly sized to offset the applicable loads in each zone, select the outdoor unit by choosing a size that meets both the load-cooling requirement, and offsets the sum of the heating load. Then, the system’s combination ratio should be evaluated and confirmed it is within the allowable range (the combination ratio compares the nominal capacity of all connected indoor units to the nominal capacity of the outdoor unit serving them). The total nominal capacity of all indoor units should be smaller than the total nominal capacity of the outdoor unit. If the combination ratio is more than 100%, the designer is undersizing the outdoor unit relative to the combined nominal capacity of the connected indoor units. In some designs, oversized indoor units may be unavoidable in the case where the smallest size indoor unit available from LG is larger than what is necessary to satisfy the zone load. This scenario may also occur when an indoor unit selection one size down from the selected unit is slightly short of fulfilling the design load requirements, and the designer must choose the next largest size unit. Sometimes it is recommended to choose a larger capacity outdoor unit if the installation space is big enough. Also, it may be prudent to oversize the outdoor unit to address those times when the weather conditions may exceed the design conditions, to minimize the possibility of ventilation systems that causes the space temperature to drift outside design parameters, or when the indoor unit’s entering air temperature falls outside the approved design temperature range. Table 111: Multi F/ Multi F Max Rated Outdoor Unit Capacity. Rated Capacity (Btu/h)* Connectable Indoor Units 186 | Cooling Heating Minimum No. of Connectable IDUs Maximum No. of Connectable IDUs Maximum Capacity Index APPLICATION GUIDELINES Outdoor Units LMU18CHV LMU24CHV LMU30CHV LMU36CHV LMU480HV LMU540HV LMU600HV 17,000 22,000 2 2 24,000 20,000 24,000 2 3 33,000 30,000 32,000 2 4 40,000 32,000 36,000 2 4 48,000 Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 48,000 54,000 2 8 65,000 52,500 58,000 2 8 73,000 60,000 64,000 2 8 81,000 MULTI F MULTI F MAX EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE Table 113: Multi F/ Multi F Max with LGRED Rated Outdoor Unit Capacity. Rated Capacity (Btu/h)* Connectable Indoor Units Cooling Heating Minimum No. of Connectable IDUs Maximum No. of Connectable IDUs Maximum Capacity Index LMU180HHV 18,000 22,000 2 2 24,000 LMU240HHV 24,000 26,000 2 3 33,000 Outdoor Units LMU300HHV 28,400 28,600 2 4 40,000 LMU360HHV 36,000 41,000 2 5 48,000 LMU420HHV 42,000 45,000 2 6 56,000 Determine the Corrected Capacity The corrected cooling / heating capacity is different from the rated cooling / heating capacity. The corrected capacity includes changes in unit performance after considering design temperatures, available capacity that can be allocated from the outdoor unit, pressure drop due to refrigerant line length, defrost operation in heating mode, and (if applicable) altitude. Depending on the location of the building, additional capacity correction factors may need to be applied. Rated cooling capacity ratings are obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Rated heating capacity ratings are obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB). To evaluate the total outdoor unit capacity at design conditions perform a selection using LATS Multi F software (preferred method) or reference the Performance Data Capacity Tables found in the Multi F outdoor unit section in this manual. All design temperatures are not explicitly shown in the charts, therefore, interpolation may be necessary to calculate the capacity for specific design conditions. Based on the premise that capacity follows a linear curve, the following formula can be applied: (y - y1) / (y2 - y1) = (x - x1) / (x2 - x1) Where y = Missing Capacity (Capacity at the Design Temperature).1 y1 = Capacity at Lower Temperature (Smaller value of the two nearest published TC datapoints). y2 = Capacity at Higher Temperature (Higher value of the two nearest published TC datapoints). x = Design Temperature (Temperature not shown in published capacity tables).2 x1 = (Smaller value of the two nearest published temperature datapoints). x2 = (Larger value of the two nearest published temperature datapoints). 1 Median between two published Total Capacity [TC] Btu/h datapoints in the capacity table. 2 Median between two nearest published temperature datapoints. Using the Indoor Unit Cooling and Heating Capacity Tables The datapoints shown in the indoor unit cooling and heating capacity charts are based on (and convey) an indoor unit operating with maximum possible refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit and before any derates are applied. In other words, the capacities displayed reflect what the indoor unit would produce if it was the only indoor unit that required capacity, and the outdoor unit did not have to allocate any capacity to another indoor unit. System operation with a combination of indoor units is not conveyed in these charts, however, the information can be used to calculate indoor unit allocated capacity (without using the system combination tables). Simply calculate by using the formula: Qidu(combi) = Qodu(rated) x Qidu(rated) ΣQidu(rated) Where Qidu(combi) Qodu(rated) Qidu(rated) ΣQidu(rated) = = = = Individual Indoor Unit Combination Capacity. Outdoor Unit Rated Capacity. Individual Indoor Unit Rated Capacity. Total Connected Indoor Unit Rated Capacity. • The formula can be used to find individual indoor unit capacity for Multi F MAX systems. • A more accurate method to determine expected capacity would be to apply the outdoor unit’s corrected capacity instead of rated capacity. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. APPLICATION GUIDELINES | 187 Application Guidelines Using the Outdoor Unit Cooling and Heating Capacity Tables EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE MULTI F MULTI F MAX Using the System Combination Tables Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Multi F system combination tables illustrate how each indoor unit receives a percentage of total outdoor unit rated capacity. Allocation is based on: • Combinations of Non-Ducted Indoor Units • Combinations of Ducted Indoor Units • Combinations of Mixed Non-Ducted and Ducted Indoor Units Multi F MAX system combination tables only show the total connected indoor unit capacity, but individual indoor unit capacity can be calculated using the formula: Qidu(combi) = Qodu(rated) x Qidu(rated) ΣQidu(rated) A more accurate method to determine expected capacity would be to apply the outdoor unit’s corrected capacity instead of rated capacity. Capacity Coefficient Factors Refrigerant Line Length Derates For air-cooled systems, a capacity correction factor may have to be applied to account for the length of the system’s refrigerant pipe. Rate of change in capacity due to increased piping lengths is shown in Table 114, Table 11593, and Table 11694. Table 114: Multi F Outdoor Unit (Multiple Piping) to Indoor Unit Refrigerant Line Length Derates. Piping Length (feet) Cooling Capacity (%) 7,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 25.0 32.8 49.2 65.6 82.0 100.0 98.4 95.8 93.2 90.6 100.0 99.2 97.8 96.4 95.0 25.0 32.8 49.2 65.6 82.0 100.0 98.0 94.8 91.6 88.4 100.0 99.0 97.4 95.8 94.2 25.0 32.8 49.2 65.6 82.0 100.0 97.6 93.8 89.9 86.1 100.0 98.6 96.4 94.1 91.9 25.0 32.8 49.2 65.6 82.0 100.0 97.2 93.0 88.8 84.6 100.0 98.2 95.4 92.6 89.8 25.0 32.8 49.2 65.6 82.0 100.0 98.6 96.4 94.1 91.9 100.0 99.6 99.0 98.3 97.7 25.0 32.8 49.2 65.6 82.0 100.0 98.2 95.4 92.4 89.6 100.0 99.2 98.0 96.6 95.4 9,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 12,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 15,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 18,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 24,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 188 | Heating Capacity (%) APPLICATION GUIDELINES Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE Table 115: Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit to Branch Distribution Unit Refrigerant Line Length Derates. Main Piping Length (feet) 16.4 32.8 49.2 65.6 82.0 98.4 114.8 131.2 147.6 164.0 180.4 Cooling Capacity (%) 100.0 98.8 97.3 95.8 94.3 92.8 91.3 89.8 88.3 86.8 85.3 Heating Capacity (%) 100.0 99.6 99.2 98.7 98.3 97.8 97.4 96.9 96.5 96.0 95.6 Figure 253: Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit to Branch Distribution Unit Refrigerant Line Length Derate Chart. 100.0 Capacity (%) 95.0 Heating capacity 90.0 Cooling capacity 85.0 Application Guidelines 80.0 75.0 70.0 0 32.8 65.6 98.4 Main piping length (ft.) 131.2 164.0 Table 116: Multi F MAX Branch Distribution Unit to Indoor Unit Refrigerant Line Length Derates. Piping Length (feet) Cooling Capacity (%) 7,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 180.4 Heating Capacity (%) 16.4 32.8 49.2 100.0 98.0 96.0 100.0 99.5 98.9 16.4 32.8 49.2 100.0 97.5 95.0 100.0 98.8 97.5 16.4 32.8 49.2 100.0 97.0 94.0 100.0 98.3 96.5 16.4 32.8 49.2 100.0 97.2 93.0 100.0 98.2 95.4 16.4 32.8 49.2 100.0 98.3 96.5 100.0 99.5 99.0 16.4 32.8 49.2 100.0 97.8 95.5 100.0 99.2 98.4 16.4 32.8 49.2 100.0 97.9 95.7 100.0 98.8 97.6 9,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 12,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 15,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 18,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 24,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models 36,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. APPLICATION GUIDELINES | 189 MULTI F MULTI F MAX EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE Altitude Correction Factor The impact of air density must be considered on systems installed at a significant altitude above sea level, therefore, locally accepted altitude correction factors must be applied. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Defrost Correction Factor for Heating Operation The outdoor unit heating capacity may need to be adjusted for frost accumulation on air-cooled systems. If design day conditions are below the dewpoint of the surrounding air, frost may not be a problem and no correction factor is needed. In certain weather conditions, however, frost may form and accumulate on the air-cooled outdoor unit coil and impact the coils ability to transfer heat. If significant frost accumulates on the outdoor unit coil, a defrost algorithm will start automatically. The timing between defrost periods is determined by the system’s ability to achieve a target head pressure value. Capacity and AHRI ratings tables do not factor in capacity reduction when frost has accumulated on the condenser coil, nor during defrost operation. Integrated heating capacity values can be obtained using the formula: Table 117: Outdoor Unit Frost Accumulation Factor (Heating)1. Entering DB (ºF) Derate factor A=BxC Where: A = Integrated Heating Capacity. B = Value found in the Capacity Table. C = Correction Factor for Frost Accumulation Factor (from Table 101). 19.4 23.0 26.6 32.0 37.4 41.0 44.6 0.98 0.95 0.93 0.86 0.93 0.96 1.0 At 85% outdoor air relative humidity. The frost accumulation factor does not account for effects of snow accumulation restricting airflow through the outdoor unit coil. 1 There will be temporary reduction in capacity when frost / ice accumulates on the outside surface of the outdoor unit heat exchanger. The level of capacity reduction depends on a number of factors, for example, outdoor temperature (°F DB), relative humidity (RH), and the amount of frost present. Check the Indoor and Outdoor Unit Selection(s) Compare the corrected cooling and heating capacities to the load calculations. Is each capacity sufficient for the zone it serves? For each indoor unit, the corrected capacity must be at least equal to the total of the cooling design load (plus ventilation load, if applicable) for the space(s) served by the indoor unit. For each indoor unit, the corrected capacity also must be at least equal to the total of the heating design load (plus ventilation load, if applicable) for the space(s) and / or thermal zones served by the indoor unit. The outdoor unit selected should be large enough to offset the total cooling load for all spaces it serves (account for ventilation air cooling load if the ventilation air has not been pretreated to room neutral conditions). The outdoor unit should also be large enough to offset the total heating load for all spaces it serves. If the corrected heating capacity ratio exceeds 100%, reselect the equipment, or change the system design by moving some of the load to another system. System Sizing Check Formulas 1. Outdoor Unit Rated Capacity. Qodu(rated) (From capacity tables). 2. Outdoor Unit Capacity at Ti, To Temperature. Qodu(Ti, To) (From capacity tables). 3 Outdoor Unit Capacity Coefficient Factor. F(Ti, To) = Qodu(Ti, To) / Qodu(rated) 4. Piping Correction Factor (From Capacity Coefficient Factor Tables). F(length) for each piping length 5. Individual Indoor Unit Combination Capacity. Qidu (combi) = Qodu(rated) x Qidu(rated) / Qidu(rated-total) 6. Individual Indoor Unit Actual Capacity. Qidu (actual) = Qodu(combi) x F(Ti, To) x F(length, altitude) Conclusions and Recommendations • Understand the design safety factors. • Reference load calculations for actual cooling and heating capacities (applies in 99% of applications – consider total load when latent load is greater than 30%). • Verify that the sensible load of the zone is satisfied. • Use caution when sizing to meet listed capacity specifications for the scheduled manufacturer’s equipment. If further system design assistance is needed, or you have a unique application you would like to discuss, contact your LG sales rep. 190 | APPLICATION GUIDELINES Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS Selecting the Best Location for the Indoor Units Note: Selecting the Best Location for the Branch Distribution (BD) Unit Note: Branch Distribution (BD) units are used only with Multi F MAX systems to distribute the refrigerant from the outdoor unit to up to eight indoor units. Select location indoors that will meet the following conditions: • Within allowable parameters for proper connection to the Multi F MAX outdoor unit and indoor unit(s); refrigerant piping and wire lengths must not exceed amounts specified by LG Electronics, U.S.A., Inc. • Condensate drain piping is not required. • Ensure there is enough space in the installation area for service purposes; install the refrigerant piping and electrical wiring system in an easily accessible location. • Level where there is enough strength to bear the weight of the BD unit. • Do not install the BD unit in a location where it would be subjected to strong radiation heat from heat sources. • Avoid an installation environment where the BD unit would be exposed to heat, water, steam, oil splattering or spray. • Install the unit in a location where any sound it generates will not disturb occupants in the surrounding rooms. • No obstacles to air circulation around the unit; keep proper distances from ceilings, doorways, floor, walls, etc. • Where high-frequency electrical noise / electromagnetic waves will not affect operation. Maintain proper distances between the BD unit(s) and electric wires, audio and visual appliances, breaker / circuit panels, etc. Selecting the Best Location for the Outdoor Unit DANGER To avoid the possibility of fire, do not install the unit in an area where combustible gas may generate, flow, stagnate, or leak. Failure to do so will cause serious bodily injury or death. WARNING Do not install the unit in a location where acidic solution and spray (sulfur) are often used as this may cause serious bodily injury or death. Do not use the unit in environments where oil, steam, or sulfuric gas are present as this may cause serious bodily injury or death. CAUTION When deciding on a location to place the outdoor unit, be sure to choose an area where run-off from defrost will not accumulate and freeze on sidewalks or driveways which may create unsafe conditions. Select a location for installing the outdoor unit that will meet the following general conditions: • A location strong enough to bear the weight of the outdoor unit. • A location that allows for optimum air flow and is easily accessible for inspection, maintenance, and service. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. APPLICATION GUIDELINES | 191 Application Guidelines Select a location for installing the indoor units that will meet the following conditions: • Indoor Units (IDUs) should not be placed in an environment where the IDUs may be exposed to harmful volatile organic compounds (VOCs) or in environments where there is improper air make up or supply or inadequate ventilation. If there are concerns about VOCs in the environment where the IDUs are installed, proper air make up or supply and/ or adequate ventilation should be provided. Additionally, in buildings where IDUs will be exposed to VOCs consider a factory-applied epoxy coating to the fan coils for each IDU. • Within allowable parameters for proper connection to the outdoor unit (or Branch Distribution unit, if a Multi F MAX system). • So that condensation drainage can be conveniently routed away. • Include enough space around the indoor unit so that it is accessible for maintenance and service purposes. • Where electrical noise / electromagnetic waves will not affect indoor unit operation. Maintain proper distances between the indoor units and electric wires, audio and visual appliances, breaker / circuit panels, etc. If the frequency signal of the appliance is unstable, then install the indoor unit a minimum of ten (10) feet away, and run the power and transmission cables through a conduit. • An area that is level and with enough strength to bear the weight of the indoor unit(s). • No obstacles to air circulation around the unit; keep proper distances from ceilings, doorways, floor, walls, etc. • An area where operation sound won’t disturb occupants. • An area that does not expose the indoor unit(s) to heat, water, steam, oil splattering or spray. MULTI F MULTI F MAX PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS Selecting the Best Location for the Outdoor Unit, continued. Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual • Where piping between the outdoor unit, indoor unit(s), and BD units (Multi F MAX systems only) are within allowable limits. • Include space for drainage to ensure condensate flows properly out of the unit when it is in heating mode. Avoid placing the outdoor unit in a low-lying area where water could accumulate. • Where it will not be subjected to direct thermal radiation from other heat sources, nor an area that would not expose the outdoor unit to heat or steam like discharge from boiler stacks, chimneys, steam relief ports, other air conditioning units, kitchen vents, plumbing vents, and other sources of extreme temperatures. • Where high-frequency electrical noise / electromagnetic waves will not affect operation. • Where operating sound from the unit will not disturb inhabitants of surrounding buildings. • Where the unit will not be exposed to direct, strong winds. Rooftop Installations If the outdoor unit is installed on a roof structure, be sure to level the unit. Ensure the roof structure and anchoring method are adequate for the unit location. Consult local codes regarding rooftop mounting. Oceanside Installation Precautions • Install the outdoor unit on the side of the building opposite from direct ocean winds. • Select a location with good drainage. • Periodically clean dust or salt particles off of the heat exchanger with water. Ocean winds may cause corrosion, particularly on the condenser and evaporator fins, which, in turn could cause product malfunction or inefficient performance. Ocean winds Ocean winds • Avoid installing the outdoor unit where it would be directly exposed to ocean winds. Additional anti-corrosion treatment may need to be applied to the outdoor unit at oceanside locations. If the outdoor unit must be placed in a location where it would be subjected to direct ocean winds, install a concrete windbreaker strong enough to block any winds. Windbreaker height and width should be more than 150% of the outdoor unit, and be installed at least 27-1/2 inches away from the outdoor unit to allow for airflow. Planning for Snow and Ice Windbreaker Ocean winds In climates that experience snow buildup, place the unit on a raised platform to ensure proper condenser airflow. The raised support platform must be high enough to allow the unit to remain above possible snow drifts. Mount the unit on a field-provided stand that is higher than the maximum anticipated snowfall for the location. Design the mounting base to prevent snow accumulation on the platform in front or back of the unit case. If necessary, provide a field fabricated hood to keep snow and ice and/or drifting snow from accumulating on the coil surfaces. Use inlet and discharge duct or hoods to prevent snow or rain from accumulating on the fan inlet and outlet guards. Best practice prevents snow from accumulating on top of the unit. Consider tie-down requirements in case of high winds or where required by local codes. 192 | APPLICATION GUIDELINES Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS Outdoor Unit Platform Requirements Figure 254: Outdoor Unit Foundation Requirements. Unit: Inch Unit: Inch Minimum 3-15/16) Minimum 3-15/16 21-1/2 Minimum 14-9/16 21-1/2 LMU18CHV and LMU24CHV Outdoor Units Minimum 14-9/16 LMU30CHV and LMU36CHV Outdoor Units Table 118: Outdoor Unit Foundation Specifications. Outdoor Unit Type Bolt Type Concrete Height Bolt Depth LMU18CHV, LMU24CHV, LMU30CHV, LMU36CHV M10-J Minimum 3-15/16 inches Minimum 2-3/4 inches LMU480HV, LMU540HV, LMU600HV M10-J Minimum 7-7/8 inches Minimum 2-3/4 inches Minimum 7-7/8 Minimum 24-13/32 15-3/4 7-7/8 Figure 255: Bolting the Outdoor Unit to the Platform. Bolting the Outdoor Unit to the Platform 1. Ensure that the concrete platform will not degrade easily, and has enough strength to bear the weight of the unit. 2. Include an H-beam support. Firmly attach the corners, otherwise the support will bend. 3. Use a hexagon nut. 4. Use anti-vibration material. 5. Include enough space around the concrete foundation for condensate drainage. 6. Seal all wiring and piping access holes to prevent bugs from entering the unit. Concrete Platform Specifications Bolt Bolt Refrigerant Pipe Connection Location Top of Outdoor Unit (Looking Down) Bolt Bolt Figure 256: Close up of Bolt Attachment. Anchor Bolt M10 13/16 2-3/4~4 23/32 • Concrete foundations should be made of one part cement, two parts sand, and four parts gravel. • The surface of the foundation should be finished with mortar with rounded edges, and weatherproofed. LMU480HV, LMU540HV, LMU600HV Outdoor Units Unit: Inch Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. APPLICATION GUIDELINES | 193 Application Guidelines Unit: Inch MULTI F MULTI F MAX PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Tie-Downs and Lightening Protection Figure 257: Lightening Protection Diagram. Tie-Downs • The strength of the roof must be checked before installing the outdoor units. • If the installation site is prone to high winds or earthquakes, when installing on the wall or roof, securely anchor the mounting base using a field-provided tie-down configuration approved by a local professional engineer. • The overall tie-down configuration must be approved by a local professional engineer. Always refer to local code when using a wind restraint system. Lightning rod Lightning rod Protection Angle (25˚~55˚) 51.5m feet Lightening Protection • To protect the outdoor unit from lightning, it should be placed within the specified lightning safety zone. Table 119: Safety Zone Specifications. Building Height (feet) 66 98 148 197 Protection Angle (˚) 55 45 35 25 Safe zone • Power cable and communication cable should be installed five (5) feet away from lightning rod. • A high-resistance ground system should be included to protect against induced lightning or indirect strike. Ground If the building does not include lightning protection, the outdoor unit may be damaged from a lightening strike. Inform the customer of this possibility in advance. Outdoor Unit Service Access and Allowable Clearances Appropriate airflow through the outdoor unit coil is critical for proper unit operation. • Include enough space for airflow and for service access. If installing multiple outdoor units, avoid placing the units where the discharge of one unit will blow into the inlet side of an adjacent unit. • If an awning is built over the unit to prevent direct sunlight or rain exposure, make sure that the discharge air of the outdoor unit isn’t restricted. • No obstacles to air circulation around the unit; keep proper distances from ceilings, fences, floor, walls, etc. (Install a fence to prevent pests from damaging the unit or unauthorized individuals from accessing it.) When installing the outdoor unit, consider service, inlet, and outlet, and minimum allowable space requirements as illustrated in the following diagrams. Minimum 11-13/16 Sun Strong roo f wind Minimum 11-13/16 Minimum 11-13/16 Strong wind Fe obsnce or tacl es Blown air Minimum 19-1/16 Minimum 11-13/16 Air inlet grille Minimum 23-5/8 Ensure that the space at the back of the outdoor unit is a minimum of 11-13/16 inches, and include a minimum of 23-5/8 inches at the right side of the unit for service. 194 | APPLICATION GUIDELINES Unit: Inch If the outdoor unit discharge side faces a wall, include a minimum of 19-11/16 inches between the outdoor unit and the wall. Install the outdoor unit so that the discharge port is set at a right angle to the wind direction. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS Clearance Requirements when Different Obstacles are Present (Unit: Inch). Obstacle on the suction side only. m u inim M " 11 /16 -13 Obstacles on the suction side and on both left and right sides. Min imu m1 1-1 3/16 " imu m2 imu 3-1 Min 9/32 6" 13/1 1m1 Application Guidelines Min " Obstacles above and on the air intake side. Obstacles above, on the air intake side, and on both left and right sides Min imu um inim M /16" 3 1 11- m1 1-1 3/16 " Min imu Obstacle just on the air discharge side. Minimum 39-3/8" Max Minimum 39-3/8" m1 imu Min 6" 1/1 9-1 6" 11/1 19- m imu m2 3-1 M 9/32 3/16 1-1 m1 u inim " " Obstacles above and on the air discharge side. " m imu Minimum 39-3/8" Min 6 11/1 19- imu Min 6" 11/1 9m1 i Min " 1/16 9-1 1 mum Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. APPLICATION GUIDELINES | 195 MULTI F MULTI F MAX PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS Clearance Requirements when Different Obstacles are Present, continued. (Unit: Inch) Where there obstacles both suction Where there are are obstacles on on both suction discharge sides (discharge side obstacle and and discharge sides (discharge side obstacle is higher outdoor unit). is higher thanthan the the outdoor unit). Wherethere there are are obstacles obstacles above, Where above,and andononboth both suctionand and discharge discharge sides suction sides(discharge (dischargeside sideobstacle obstacle higher than than the the outdoor isishigher outdoor unit). unit). 6" 11/1 16" 19- -11/ umm 19 m i ax mu Table 120: Ratio among H, A, and L. L A M axi Minimum 39-3/8" Minimum 39-3/8" H<L If a stand is necessary, it should be contained (not open frame) to prevent the discharge air from short cycling. 6" /16" 11 19- M 19 L H H m imu Min " um /16 inim -11 3/1 1-1 " m 1 /16 imu -13 Minm 11 imu Min 0 < L ≤ 1/2 H 29-1/32 inches 1/2 H < L 39-3/8 inches Set Stand as: L ≤ H L≤H um inim M A L13/16" 11- m imu Min 6" 13/1 11- A Where there are obstacles on both suction and discharge sides (discharge side obstacle is lower than the outdoor unit). Where there are obstacles above, and on both suction and discharge sides (discharge side obstacle is lower than the outdoor unit). m imu Max 6" 11/1 19- Minimum 39-3/8" Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual M H imu Min 6" 11/1 9m1 um im Min /16" 13 11- i Min L M Series installation /8" 9-3 m3 u inim Side-by-side series installation. M Minimum 23-19/32" /4" 8-3 m7 u inim 6" 13/1 1m1 imu Min Minimum 24" Minimum 24" Minimum 39-3/8" 196 | " 3/16 1-1 1 mum “L” should be lower than “H”. If a stand is necessary, it should be contained (not open frame) to prevent the discharge air from short cycling. APPLICATION GUIDELINES Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. M um inim 12" REFRIGERANT PIPING DESIGN & LAYOUT BEST PRACTICES “Design Guideline Summary” on page 198 “Creating a Balanced System” on page 200 “Condensate Drain Piping” on page 201 MULTI F MULTI F MAX REFRIGERANT PIPING DESIGN Design Guideline Summary The following are examples of manual pipe size calculations. Designers are highly encouraged to use LATS for Multi F systems. Device Connection Limitations • The minimum number of connected and operating indoor units to Multi F / Multi F MAX systems is two, taking into consideration of the minimum combination ratio. • The maximum number of indoor units for each Multi F / Multi F MAX heat pump systems is: Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual LMU18CHV = 2 LMU24CHV = 3 LMU30CHV = 4 LMU36CHV = 4 LMU480HV = 8 LMU540HV = 8 LMU600HV = 8 One of the most critical elements of multi-zone systems is the refrigerant piping. The following pages list pipe length limits that must be followed in the design of Multi F and Multi F MAX refrigerant pipe systems: Using Refrigerant Components Field-supplied elbows are allowed as long as they are designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The designer, however, should be cautious with the quantity and size of fittings used, and must account for the additional pressure losses in equivalent pipe length calculation for each branch. The equivalent pipe length of each elbow must be added to each pipe segment. Table 121:Equivalent Piping Length for Elbows, Y-branches, and Branch Distribution Units. Component 1/4 0.5 Elbow (ft.) Y-Branch Kit (ft., Multi F MAX systems only)1 Branch Distribution Unit (ft., Multi F MAX systems only) 1 Size (Inches) 3/8 1/2 5/8 0.6 0.7 0.8 3/4 1.2 1.6 8.2 Kit contains two Y-branches: one for liquid and one for vapor. Multi F System Example: LMU36CHV outdoor unit with four (4) indoor units connected. ODU: Outdoor Unit. IDU: Indoor Unit. A, B, C, D: Pipes from Outdoor Unit to Indoor Unit. A B Max. 49.2 feet Max. 24.6 feet C D Table 122:Multi F Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Piping System Limitations. Outdoor Unit Minimum Length for Each Pipe (ft.) LMU18CHV Maximum Piping Length to Each Indoor Unit (ft.) A B C D Maximum Total Piping Length for Each System (ft.) 10 82 82 - - 164 LMU24CHV 10 82 82 82 - 246.1 LMU30CHV 10 82 82 82 82 246.1 LMU36CHV 10 82 82 82 82 246.1 198 | DESIGN & PRACTICES Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX REFRIGERANT PIPING DESIGN Design Guideline Summary The following are examples of manual pipe size calculations. Designers are highly encouraged to use LATS for Multi F systems. Multi F MAX System with One Branch Distribution Unit Example: LMU540HV outdoor unit with four (4) indoor units, and one (1) branch distribution unit connected. IDU BDU A B h1 ≤ 98.4 feet h2 ≤ 49.2 feet IDU B IDU B h3 ≤ 32.8 feet Refrigerant Piping Design and Best Practices ODU: Outdoor Unit. IDU: Indoor Unit. BDU: Branch Distribution Unit. A: Main Pipe. B: Branch Pipe (Branch Distribution Unit to Indoor Unit[s]). ODU B IDU Multi F MAX System with Two Branch Distribution Units A Y-Branch IDU BDU B A IDU B IDU h4 ≤ 49.2 feet B A IDU BDU h2 ≤ 49.2 feet ODU: Outdoor Unit. IDU: Indoor Unit. BD: Branch Distribution Unit(s). ΣA: Main Pipe. ΣB: Branch Pipe (Branch Distribution Unit[s] to Indoor Unit[s]). ODU h3 ≤ 32.8 feet Example: LMU540HV outdoor unit with seven (7) indoor units, and two (2) branch distribution units connected. B IDU B h1 ≤ 98.4 feet IDU B B IDU Table 123: Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Piping System Limitations. Total piping length (ΣA + ΣB) Minimum Main pipe (Outdoor Unit to Pipe Length Branch Distribution Units: ΣA) Maximum (ELF = Equivalent Total branch piping length (ΣB) Length of pipe in Feet) Minimum Branch pipe (Branch Distribution Units to Indoor Units: B) Maximum If outdoor unit is above or below indoor unit (h1) Elevation Differential Between the farthest two indoor units (h2) (All Elevation Limitations are Between branch distribution unit and farthest Measured in Actual connected indoor unit(s) (h3) Feet) Between branch distribution units (h4) ≤475.7 feet 10 feet ≤180.4 feet ≤295.3 feet 10 feet ≤49.2 feet ≤98.4 feet ≤49.2 feet Table 124: Multi F MAX Piping Sizes. Pipe A Piping Main Branch Pipe B (inch) Liquid Ø3/8 Gas Ø3/4 Depends on the size of the indoor unit piping ≤32.8 feet ≤49.2 feet Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DESIGN & PRACTICES | 199 REFRIGERANT PIPING DESIGN Creating a Balanced System / Manual Layout Procedure MULTI F MULTI F MAX Creating a Balanced / Quality Piping System Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Unlike designing duct-work or chilled and hot water pipe systems where balancing dampers, ball valves, orifices, circuit setters, or other flow control devices can be installed to modify or balance the flow of cooling medium, these cannot be used in a Multi F system. Therefore, variable refrigerant flow systems have to be designed to be “self balanced.” Balanced liquid refrigerant distribution is solely dependent on the designer using the correct pipe size for each segment. Pipe sizing considerations include pipe length, pipe segment pressure drop relative to other pipe segments in the system, type and quantity of elbows, bends present, fitting installation orientation, and end use device elevation differences. The designer should avoid creating excessive pressure drop. When liquid refrigerant is subjected to excessive pressure drop, liquid refrigerant will change state and “flash” to vapor. Vapor present in a stream of liquid refrigerant before reaching the indoor unit coil (or branch distribution unit for Multi F MAX systems) results in a loss of system control and causes damage to the components. The pipe system must be designed in a manner that avoids the creation of unwanted vapor. Refrigerant Piping System Verification To ensure that the refrigerant piping design is suitable for the system, a LATS refrigerant piping design software report must be provided with every Multi F order. Following the installation, if any changes or variations to the design were necessary, an “as-built” LATS piping design software report must be provided to LG prior to system commissioning. User should always check the LATS report actual pipe layout versus pipe limits. Any field changes, such as re-routing, shortening or lengthening a pipe segment, adding or eliminating elbows and/or fittings, re-sizing, adding, or eliminating indoor units, changing the mounting height or moving the location of a device or fitting during installation should be done with caution and ALWAYS VERIFIED in LATS MULTI F SOFTWARE before supplies are purchased or installed. Doing so ensures profitable installation, eliminates rework, and ensures easier system commissioning. Manual Layout Procedure 1. Choose the location of the indoor units on the building drawing. 2. Choose the location of all Y-branch and branch distribution units (if a Multi F MAX system) and note them on the building drawing. Verify that all fittings are positioned per the guideline limitations in “LG Engineered Multi F MAX Y-Branch Kit” on page 217. 3. Plan the route for interconnecting piping. Draw a one-line depiction of the pipe route chosen on the building drawing. 4. Calculate the actual length of each pipe segment and note it on the building drawing. 5. Using the data obtained while selecting the system components, list the corrected cooling capacity next to each indoor unit on the drawing. 6. Starting at the indoor unit located farthest from the outdoor unit, sum the corrected cooling capacity of all indoor units served by the pipe segment for each branch and runout pipe (indoor units and branch distribution units [Multi F MAX systems only]). Record these values next to each segment. 7. Verify the size of the liquid and vapor lines. 8. If a Multi F MAX system, refer to the branch distribution unit information on page 227 and the Y-branch kit information on page 233 to verify the part number of each Y-branch and branch distribution unit based on the connected downstream nominal capacity served. 9. Calculate the equivalent pipe length in feet of each pipe segment. If a Multi F MAX system, Y-branch equivalent lengths should be totaled with the upstream segment only. Use equivalent pipe length data when it is provided with field-purchased fittings. If not available, use the data provided in Table 121 on page 198 to estimate the equivalent length of field-provided pipe and fittings for each segment. Equivalent lengths should be totaled with the upstream segment only. 10. For Multi F systems, verify the equivalent pipe length complies with the limitations in Table 122 on page 198. For Multi F MAX systems, verify the equivalent pipe length complies with the limitations in Table 123 on page 199. If the limitations are exceeded, either reroute the pipe or change the location of the indoor unit, Y-branch fittings and branch distribution units (if Multi F MAX systems), so the design conforms with all limitations. 11. If pipe length is adjusted as described in Step 10 above, verify again if the length of the design complies with the limitations in Table 1220 (Multi F) or Table 1231 (Multi F MAX). 12. Use LATS Multi F software to verify the manually sized pipe design is acceptable. When entering the length of pipe segments in LATS Multi F software, enter the equivalent pipe length. Account for the additional pressure drop created by elbows, valves, and other fittings present in each segment by adding their respective equivalent pipe length to the actual pipe length. 200 | DESIGN & PRACTICES Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX INSTALLATION & LAYOUT BEST PRACTICES Condensate Drain Piping Condensate Drain Piping Indoor Units All indoor units generate water during cooling operation, therefore, how to properly handle this condensation must be considered. Some indoor units include factory-installed drain pumps; others apply the gravity drain method. Table 125:Indoor Unit Drain Piping Specifications. Drain Type Drain Pipe Diameter (OD / ID, in.) Art Cool Wall-Mounted Art Cool Gallery Standard Wall-Mounted Ceiling-Concealed Ducted (Low Static and High Static) Gravity Gravity Gravity 27-1/2 in. Lift Drain Pump, Factory Installed 27-1/2 in. Lift Drain Pump, Factory Installed Gravity 13/16 / 5/8 13/16 / 5/8 13/16 / 5/8 Four-Way Ceiling Cassette Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Figure 258:Diagram of an Indoor Unit with a Gravity Drain. — — — Ø1-1/4 / Ø1 0.105 Ø1-1/4 / Ø1 0.105 Ø3/4 / — — Figure 259:Diagram of an Indoor Unit with a Drain Pump. ≤11-13/16 in. Insulation ≤Max. 27-1/2 in. Metal clamp Flexible drain hose Drain pan Drain Amount (gal. / min. at 0.033 ft. height) Refrigerant Piping Design and Best Practices Indoor Unit Insulation PVC elbow PVC 1/50~1/100 slope PVC Flexible hose Drain pump Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. DESIGN & PRACTICES | 201 Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual MULTI F MULTI F MAX 202 | DESIGN & PRACTICES Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS “General Information” on page 204 “Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details” on page 207 “Remote Controller Connections” on page 212 “Indoor Unit Group Control” on page 213 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual General Information MULTI F MULTI F MAX • All power (line voltage) wiring and communication cable installation must be performed by trained service providers working in accordance with all local, state, and National Electrical Code (NEC) / UL / ETL federal regulations related to electrical equipment and wiring, and following the manufacturer product diagrams, requirements, and instructions in this manual. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Be sure that main power to the unit is completely off before proceeding. Follow all safety and warning information outlined at the beginning of this manual. Failure to do so may cause electric shock and bodily injury. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously (circuit breaker should be resistant to electromagnetic currents). Be sure that the circuit breaker or some other emergency power cutoff device is in place before any power wiring is done to the system. Failure to do so may cause bodily injury or death. • Never touch any power lines or live cables before all power is cutoff to the system. To do so may cause bodily injury or death. • Power wiring and communication cable sizes must comply with all applicable federal, state, and local codes. Undersized wiring may lead to unacceptable voltage at the unit and may cause a fire, which may cause bodily injury or death. • Properly ground the outdoor unit, indoor units, and branch distribution units. Ground wiring must always be installed by a trained technician. Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, which may cause bodily injury or death. • Verify that the branch switch and circuit breaker are set to OFF before installing the wiring system. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Install appropriately sized breakers / fuses / overcurrent protection switches and wiring in accordance with local, state, and NEC regulations related to electrical equipment and wiring, and following the instructions in this manual. Generated overcurrent may include some amount of direct current. Using an oversized breaker or fuse may result in electric shock, physical injury or death. • Do not connect ground wire to refrigerant, gas, sewage, or water piping; to lightning rods; to telephone ground wiring; or to the building plumbing system. Failure to properly provide a NEC-approved earth ground can result in electric shock, fire, physical injury or death. • Consider ambient conditions (temperature, direct sunlight, inclement weather, etc.) when selecting, installing, and connecting the power wiring. • Properly ground the outdoor unit, indoor units, and branch distribution units. Ground wiring must always be installed by a trained technician. Improperly grounded wire can cause communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. • Install appropriately sized breakers / fuses / overcurrent protection switches and wiring in accordance with local, state, and NEC regulations related to electrical equipment and wiring, and following the instructions in this manual. Generated overcurrent may include some amount of direct current. Using an oversized breaker or fuse may result in equipment malfunction and property damage. • Do not connect ground wire to refrigerant, gas, or water piping; to lightning rods; to telephone ground wiring; or to the building plumbing system. Failure to properly provide a NEC-approved earth ground can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Do not operate the air conditioning system until the refrigerant piping installation is complete. Operating the system before refrigerant piping is finalized may damage the compressor. 204 | WIRING CONNECTIONS Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS General Information Power Supply / Power Wiring Specifications Figure 260: Multi F / Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit • Multi F systems operate at 1Ø, 208-230V, 60Hz, and power is wired to the outdoor unit Power Wiring. only. The outdoor unit will supply power to the indoor units and the branch distribution units (Multi F MAX systems only) through the communication / connection (power) cable. " 1/8 6" ± • Power supply to the outdoor unit should be selected based on NEC and local codes. 1 / 7 Maximum allowable voltage fluctuation ±10% or nameplate rated value. • Power wiring to the outdoor unit(s) should be solid or stranded, and must comply with all Power Wiring, Ground local and national electrical codes. to Outdoor Unit GN • Properly ground the outdoor unit and indoor unit per NEC and local codes. /YL • Ground wire should be longer than the common power / communication wires. 13/ 16" • Connect the wiring firmly so the wires cannot be easily pulled out. • Refer to the inside of the chassis cover or control cover for circuit and terminal block diagrams. " 1/8 • Always match color codes of each wire and follow wiring diagram. 6" ± 1 / 7 • Do not install power wiring to the outdoor unit and the communication / connection (power) cable to theGround, indoor unit in the same conduit. Power Wiring, Use separate conduits. Communication Cable GN /YL 13/ 16” GN/YL =grounded, (Ground, Yellow) Always have a trained service provider properly ground the outdoor unit. If the outdoor unit is not properly there is a risk of electric shock, Power Wiring, Ground physical injury, or death. to Outdoor Unit GN /YL Communication / Connection (Power) Cable Specifications 13/ 1 " • Multi F Systems: Figure 261:Multi F /6Multi F MAX Outdoor and Indoor / Branch Distribution Unit Wiring and Com• All communication / connection (power) cable from the outdoor unit to the indoor munications Cable Diagram. unit to be minimum 18 AWG, four (4) conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if " 1/8 6" ± shielded, it must be grounded to the chassis of the outdoor unit only), and must com7/1 ply with applicable local and national codes. Power Wiring, Ground, Communication Cable • Multi F MAX Systems: From Outdoor Unit • All communication / connection (power) cable from the outdoor unit to the branch To Indoor Unit or from the GN distribution unit(s) to be minimum 16 AWG, four (4) conductor, stranded, shielded or Outdoor Unit to the Branch /YL Distribution Unit unshielded (if shielded, it must be grounded to the chassis of the outdoor unit only), 13/ and must comply with applicable local and national codes. 16” GN/YL = (Ground, Yellow) • All communication / connection (power) cable from the branch distribution unit(s) to the indoor units to be minimum 18 AWG, four (4) conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if shielded, it must be grounded to the chassis of the outdoor unit only), and must comply with applicable local and national codes. • Insulation material as required by local code. • Rated for continuous exposure of temperatures up to 140°F. • Firmly attach the cable; provide slack but secure in a way to prevent external forces from being imparted on the terminal block. • Wiring should be completed without splices. • Use a conduit for the communications / connection (power) cable from the outdoor unit to the indoor units and branch distribution unit(s). Electrical interference my cause product malfunction. • The communications / connection (power) cable from the outdoor unit to the indoor units / branch distribution unit(s) should be separated and isolated from power wiring to the outdoor unit, computers, radio and television broadcasting facilities, as well as medical imaging equipment. Electrical interference my cause product malfunction. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. WIRING CONNECTIONS | 205 Wiring Connections From Outdoor Unit To Indoor Unit or from the /8" 1Branch Outdoor Unit to the 6" ± Distribution Unit 7/1 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS General Information Figure 262:Multi F System General Power / Communications System Schematic. Indoor Units Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Power Supply Circuit Breaker Ground Wiring Outdoor Unit Figure 263:Multi F MAX System General Power / Communications System Schematic. Indoor Units BD Unit Power Supply Circuit Breaker BD Unit Ground Wiring Outdoor Unit • Secure the separate wires in the control box panel using zip ties. • Secure wiring with accessory clamps so that it does not touch piping. • Use a conduit for the cable. • Outside the unit, make sure the communications cable / power wiring are separately shielded, otherwise, the outdoor unit operation may be affected by electrical noise and will malfunction or fail. • For details on the Multi F with LG RED and Multi F MAX with LG RED units, refer to the engineering manuals on www.lg-dfs.com. 206 | WIRING CONNECTIONS Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details Figure 264: Multi F LMU18CHV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable. L1 L2 Power Supply Main Switch Outdoor Unit G Circuit Breaker L1 L2 Outdoor Unit Terminal Block G L1 Fuse L2 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(A) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(B) Three-wire Power Wiring (Including Ground) COMMUNICATION CABLE 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 1(L1) 2(L2) Wiring Connections POWER WIRING 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block Unit A Unit B • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • For Multi F with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual. • Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. WIRING CONNECTIONS | 207 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details MULTI F MULTI F MAX Figure 265:Multi F LMU24CHV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable. L1 L2 Power Supply Main Switch Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual G Circuit Breaker L1 Outdoor Unit L2 G Outdoor Unit Terminal Block L1 Fuse L2 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(A) 3(B) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(C) Three-wire Power Wiring (Including Ground) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block Unit A Unit B Unit C POWER WIRING COMMUNICATIONS CABLE • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • For Multi F with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual. • Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. 208 | WIRING CONNECTIONS Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details Figure 266:Multi F LMU30CHV and LMU36CHV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable. L1 L2 Power Supply Main Switch G Circuit Breaker L1 Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Terminal Block L2 G L1 L2 Fuse 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(A) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(B) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(C) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(D) Three-wire Power Wiring (Including Ground) 2(L2) 3 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 1(L1) 2(L2) Wiring Connections 1(L1) 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block Indoor Unit Terminal Block Unit A Unit B Unit C Unit D POWER WIRING COMMUNICATIONS CABLE • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • For Multi F with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual. • Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. WIRING CONNECTIONS | 209 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details Figure 267:Multi F MAX LMU480HV and LMU540HV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable. L N Power Supply Main Switch Outdoor unit Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Circuit Breaker Three-wire Power Wiring (Including Ground) L N Outdoor Unit Terminal Block G L1 Fuse L2 1( L1 ) 2 (L2 ) 3 (A ) 1( L1 ) 2 (L2 ) 3 (B) Branch Distribution Unit (B) Branch Distribution Unit (A) 1(L1) 2(L2) S 1(L1) 2(L2) S * Same Wiring as Branch Distribution Unit (A) 1(L1) 2(L2) 1(L1) S 2(L2) 1(L1) 2(L2) S 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block 1(L1) 2(L2) S 1(L1) 2(L2) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block S 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block POWER WIRING COMMUNICATIONS CABLE • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • For Multi F MAX with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual. • Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. 210 | WIRING CONNECTIONS Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. MULTI F MULTI F MAX ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details Figure 268:Multi F MAX LMU600HV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable. L N Power Supply Main Switch Outdoor unit Outdoor Unit Terminal Block Circuit Breaker Three-wire Power Wiring (Including Ground) L N G L1 Fuse L2 1( L1 ) 2 (L2 ) 3 (A ) 3 (B) Wiring Connections Branch Distribution Unit (B) Branch Distribution Unit (A) 1(L1) 2(L2) 1(L1) 2(L2) S S * Same Wiring as Branch Distribution Unit (A) 1(L1) 2(L2) S 1(L1) 2(L2) 1(L1) 2(L2) S 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block 1(L1) 2(L2) S 1(L1) 2(L2) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block S 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block 1(L1) 2(L2) 3 Indoor Unit Terminal Block POWER WIRING COMMUNICATIONS CABLE • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death. • For Multi F MAX with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual. • Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. • Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction. Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. WIRING CONNECTIONS | 211 MULTI F MULTI F MAX ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Remote Controller Connections • Communication cable from indoor unit to remote controller(s) is to be 22 AWG, 3-conductor, twisted, stranded, unshielded. Wiring must comply with all applicable local and national codes. • If using the LG Controller / Extension cable and the length needs to be further extended, the LG Extension Kit (sold separately) must be used. A maximum of four (4) kits (up to 165 feet) can be used. • Remote controllers have hardwired connections: SIG - 12V - GND (Comm.) terminals. • Indoor unit controller connections depend on type of indoor unit being installed. Some indoor units use terminal block connections; other indoor units use Molex connections. See diagrams below for the two options. Refer to the wiring diagram schematic found in the indoor unit itself, or to the indoor unit wiring diagrams in the Engineering Manuals for more information. • NEVER splice, cut, or extend cable length with field provided cable. Always include enough cable to cover distance between the indoor unit and the remote controller. • Set the indoor unit operating parameters using DIP switches, or by setting up the remote controller. Refer to the indoor unit installation manuals for more details. Common Signal 12VDC Figure 269:One Example of Indoor Unit to Zone Controller Connection. YL RD Figure 270:Another Example of Indoor Unit to Zone Controller Connection. BK 4 5 6 Indoor Unit CN-REMO BK Not used Not used Not used BACnet Common BACnet- 13 14 15 BACnet+ Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual From Indoor Units to Remote Controllers RD YL Typical Indoor Unit YL RDBK Front Cable connected to Zone Controller is the factory default connection. 212 | WIRING CONNECTIONS CN-REMO Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. Back MULTI F MULTI F MAX ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Indoor Unit Group Control Between Multiple Indoor Units Operating as a Group (Group Control) Figure 271:Example of Indoor Unit Group to Zone Controller Connections (Sig-12V-GND [Comm.] Terminal). If any indoor units were specified to operate in unison: • Before running cable, decide which indoor unit will be the “Master.” The other indoor units in that group will be designated as “Slave(s).” The zone controller will be connected to the “Master.” • Set the pertinent DIP switch at each indoor unit to identify the Master and Slave(s). On wall mounted indoor unit models, set the assignment using the handheld remote controller. • Use a daisy chain configuration and connect all of the group’s indoor units together starting at the “Master” unit. • NEVER splice, cut, or extend cable length with field provided cable. Always include enough cable to cover distance between all components. For indoor units with hardwired connections SIG - 12V - GND (Comm.) terminals: Indoor Unit Signal 12VDC Comm. Signal 12VDC Comm. 4 5 Indoor Unit Signal 12VDC Comm. 6 Signal 12VDC Comm. Figure 272:Example of Indoor Unit Group to Zone Controller Connections (CN-REMO). On All Indoor Unit Styles On All Indoor Unit Styles CN-REMO CN-REMO On All Indoor Unit Styles CN-REMO LG Supplied LG Supplied Group Control Kit (PZCWRCG3) For indoor units with CN-REMO connections: Use one (or multiple) Group Control Kit(s) (sold separately) containing extension and Y-splitter cables. Use one (1) group control cable kit for each indoor unit in the group except for the last indoor unit. NEVER splice, cut, or extend cable length with field provided cable. Table 126:Accessories for Some Group Control Applications. Model Accessory Image • Cable connected to zone controller is the factory default connection. Number • Indoor unit connections depend on indoor unit type. General Specifications Wired Remote Group Control Cable Assembly - Required PZCWRCG3 for connecting multiple indoor units to a control group • Wired remote controllers can be connected to all indoor unit types. • Wireless controllers can be used in conjunction with wired remote controllers. Wired Remote/Wired Remote • A dry contact unit can be connected with a central controller simultaneously. Extension Cable - Required - The master indoor unit is recognized by the dry contact unit and the central for extending the distance controller. PZCWRC1 between indoor units or - Group Control only available for indoor units manufactured after February remote controllers in a control 2009. group - The central controller can control indoor units after setting the address of the master indoor unit only. - Slave indoor unit cannot be individually controlled by central controller. - Slave indoor unit will operate like master indoor unit. • If an error occurs with the indoor unit, the error will be displayed on the wired remote controller. • The following functions are available with group control: • Selection of operation options (operation/mode/set temperature) • Control of air flow rate (High/Medium/Low) Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. WIRING CONNECTIONS | 213 Wiring Connections • From the controller to the master indoor unit, use 22 AWG, 3-conductor, twisted, stranded, unshielded. All wiring must comply with all applicable local / national codes. • From the master indoor unit to the slave indoor unit(s), daisy chain using 22 AWG, 3-conductor, twisted, stranded, unshielded. All wiring must comply with all applicable local / national codes. •( Do not attach wire to 12VDC terminal to the slave indoor units). All wiring must comply with all applicable local and national codes. • NEVER splice, cut, or extend cable length; always include enough cable to cover distance between all components. Master Indoor Unit MULTI F MULTI F MAX ACRONYMS Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual Table 127: Table of Acronyms. ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene IAQ Indoor Air Quality AC Air Conditioner IDU Indoor Unit ACP Advanced Control Platform IUCF Indoor Unit Correction Factor ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute KTL Korea Testing Laboratories ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning LATS LG Air Conditioning Technical Solution AWG American Wire Gauge LGAP LG Air Conditioner Protocol BDU Branch Distribution (Unit) MAT Mixed Air Temperature Btu/h British Thermal Units per hour MBh Thousands BTUs per hour CCR Corrected Capacity Ratio MCA Maximum Circuit Ampacity CDOA Coupled Dedicated Outdoor Air MFS Maximum Fuse Size CFM Cubic Feet per Minute NEC National Electrical Code CR Combination Ratio OAT Outdoor Air Temperature DB Dry Bulb ODU Outdoor Unit dB(A) Decibels with “A” frequency weighting OUCF Outdoor Unit Correction Factor DDOAS Decoupled Dedicated Outdoor Air PDI Power Distribution Indicator DFS Duct-Free Split PI Power Input DI Digital Input PTAC Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner DO Digital Output PVE Polyvinyl Ether EEV Electronic Expansion Valve RAT Return Air Temperature ELF Equivalent Length in Feet RCL Refrigerant Concentration Limit EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene M-Class Rubber SC Sensible Capacity ESP External Static Pressure TC Total Capacity ETL Electronic Testing Laboratories VAV Variable Air Volume HACR Heating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration VRF Variable Refrigerant Flow H/M/L High / Medium / Low VRP Ventilation Rate Procedure 214 | WIRING CONNECTIONS Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification. ©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp. 20001747 ISO 9001: 2008 LG ELECTRONICS INC. LG Electronics, U.S.A., Inc. Commercial Air Conditioning Division 4300 North Point Parkway Alpharetta, Georgia 30022 www.lg-dfs.com LG Electronics Products Support 1-888-865-3026 USA Follow the prompts for HVAC products. EM_MultiF_IDU_3_18 Supersedes EM_MultiF_IDU_10_17 EM_MultiF_IDU_11_16 EM_MultiF_IDU_7_16 EM_MultiF_IDU_7_15 EM-MultiFIDU-01-15 EM-MultiFIDU-06-14 DFS-EM-AJ-002-US 014A03
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project